Instruction/ maintenance manual of the product Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 Ricoh
Go to page of 1171
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =108 // P rint sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =108 // P rint sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.32 0000 mm In acc ordance wi th IEC 6 0417, thi s machi ne uses t he foll owing symbo ls for th e main power swit ch: a a a a means POWE R ON.
i Manuals f or This Machine The follow ing manuals descr ibe the operatio nal procedures of thi s machine. For particular functions, see the r e levant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are sp ecific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBi nder V2 Lite Des kT opB inde r V 2 L ite is a ut ilit y i ncl uded on t he CD -RO M l abe led “ Scanner Dr iver & Do cume nt M ana ge men t U til itie s ” .
iii What You Can Do with This Machine The fol lowing introd uces the func tions of this ma chine, and the re levant ma nu- als containi n g detailed infor m ati on about them. Note ❒ Some functions m any not be available depending on your m achine type.
iv Fax Trans mission and Recept ion through the Internet • You can send fax docu ments through e-mail by sp ecifying the recipient' s e-mail address (Trans- mitt ing Int ernet F ax) . You can receive se nt doc uments via Internet F ax, or from comput- ers (Rece iving Internet Fax ).
v Administr ating the Machine (Secu rity Functions) The securi ty functions protect docu- ments from being copied without p erm iss ion or un aut h ori zed acc ess via the net work. See p.85 “ Secu rity ” . Note ❒ This fun ction is onl y ava ila ble when th e printer/ scanne r and fax units are in stalled.
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Manua ls for This Mach ine .... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... .... i What You Can Do with Thi s Machine ....... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... .
vii User Co de (M FP) ... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ... 45 Registering a New User Code .... ....... .......... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... ....
viii 7. Secu rity Securi ty ....... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... ...... 8 5 Primary Securit y Functions ..... .......... ...... ........... ...... .......... .......
1 Copyr ights and Trademarks Trade marks Micr oso ft ® , Window s ® and Windows NT ® are registered trademarks of Micro- soft Co rporation in t he Un ited States and /or ot her co untries. PostScri pt ® an d Ac rob at ® are a registered tradem ark of Ado be Systems Incor po- rated.
2 Information about Installe d Software expat • The so ftware inc luding con troller, etc. (herei nafter “ software ” ) in stall ed on this produc t uses the expat Version 1.95.2 (hereinafter “ exp at ” ) under t he con- diti ons men tio ned b elow.
3 NetBSD 1. C opyr ight N otice of N etBS D For all users t o use this product: This p roduct contain s NetBSD o perating syst em: For the mos t pa rt, t he s oftwa re con sti tuting the NetB SD oper atin g sys tem i s not in the public domai n ; its aut hors r etain t heir c opyright .
4 2. Authors Name List All prod uct names mentio ned herein are trademarks of their r espective owners. The fo llowing not ices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that we have me ntioned i n this d ocument: • This prod uct inclu des software d eveloped by th e University of California, Berk eley and its co ntributo rs.
5 Sa blot ro n Sablotron ( Version 0.82 ) Copyright (c) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Re- serve a) The app lication software in stalled o n this produc t includ es the Sablot ron soft- ware Versi on 0.82 (herei n after, “ Sablotron 0.82 ” ), with modifications made by the prod uct manufacturer .
6 SAS L CMU libsasl Tim Mar tin Rob Earhart Rob Siemborski Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mell on University. A ll rights reserved. Redistribution and use in so urce and binary forms, with or w ithout mo.
7 MD4 Co py righ t (C ) 199 0-2, RS A Dat a Se cur ity, In c. Al l righ ts re se rve d. Lic ens e to copy an d us e this s oftw are is grante d prov id ed that it is ide ntif ied as the “ RSA Data Security, In c. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm ” in all material ment ioning or referencing this softwa re or this function.
8 How to Read This Manual Symb ols The follow ing set of symbols is us ed in this m anual. R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machin e without following t he in- str uction s unde r thi s symb ol.
9 ENER GY S TAR Progr am • Low Po wer mode This prod uct au t omati cal ly low ers its powe r con sum pt ion 1 minut e after fin- ishin g the last c opy or print job. Fax rece ption and p rinting is still possible in Low Power mode, b ut to make copies, you have to p ress the oper ation switc h first .
10 •D u p l e x P r i o r i t y To conser ve paper, the Duplex function (1-Sided → 2 -Side d) ca n be selec ted pref eren tiall y w hen you tur n o n th e op er ation swit ch o r t he m ain po wer switch, press the { { { { Clear Mod es } } } } key, or the m achine rese ts itsel f automa tical ly.
11 1. Getting Started Guide to Comp onents 1. Expo sure glass cove r Lower this over origina ls. 2. Auto Document Feed er See p.13 “ Oth er I tems ” . 3. Expo sure glass Plac e origin als face down here . 4. Internal tray Cop ied, pr inted pa per, or fax m essa ges are delivered here.
Getti ng Started 12 1 8. On indicator Lights when t he operation switch is turned on, and goes off when the switch is turned of f. 9. Operation switch Press to turn the powe r on (the On indi- cator ligh ts). To turn the power off, press agai n (the On i ndica tor goes o ff).
Other It ems 13 1 Other Items • Exte rnal 1. Auto Document Feed er Fee d s in o rig in al s au tom at ic al ly. 2. Paper tray unit (Tray 2) Holds 50 0 sheets. • Internal A Fax unit All ows you to use the facsimile functi on. B Print er/Scanne r unit Allows you t o use the pr inter and scanner functions.
Getti ng Started 14 1 Note ❒ You ca nnot i nstall tw o or m ore of t he opti ons bel ow: Pa rall el port I EEE 1284 interface board, I EE E 1394 i n terface board, I EE E 802.
Cont rol Panel 15 1 Control Panel This illust ration shows t he control panel of th e machine with fax, pr inter , and scanner installed. 1. Fax fu nction keys Refere nce Facs imile Ref erence <B asic Featu res> and Facsimi le Reference <Adv anced Features> 2.
Getti ng Started 16 1 14. Main power indicator and O n indicator The main pow er ind icator ligh ts when th e ma in po w er s witc h is tu rne d on . Th e On indicator lights w hen the opera tion s witc h is on . Importa nt ❒ Do not tur n off th e main po wer switc h while the On ind icator i s lit or blinking.
Cont rol Panel 17 1 Display The display pa nel shows machine st atus, error messages, and function menus. Importa nt ❒ A fo rce or imp act of m ore t han 30 N (abo ut 3 kg f) wi ll d ama ge th e disp lay. The cop y display is set a s the default scr een when the machin e is turned on.
Getti ng Started 18 1 Common ke y operations The following ke ys are comm on to all screens: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key list [ Cancel ] Deletes a select ed function or entered val ues, and then the previous di spla y re tur ns. [ Exit ] The previou s display re turns.
19 2. Combined Function Operations Changing Mo des Note ❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the fol lowing situations: • When scanning a fax m essage for transmission • During immediate tra nsmi.
Combined Fun ction Operati ons 20 2 - - - - System Re set The machine returns automatically to its initial conditio n when the job is fin- ished, afte r a cert ain period of time has elapsed. This function is called “ Syst em Reset ” . Note ❒ You c an change t he System R eset time .
Multi- Access 21 2 Mult i-Acce ss You can carry out another job using a different function while th e current job is being p erformed. Performing m ultiple functions simultane ously like th is is calle d “ Mu lti- acc es sing ” . This allows you to handl e jobs efficiently, regardless of how the machin e is being used .
Combined Fun ction Operati ons 22 2 b … mea ns that these f unction s can be us ed toge ther. $ … means that you can inter rupt the current jo b with Function keys to pro ceed to a subsequent job. 1 … mean s that ano ther job wil l automa ticall y start after the curr ent job is fin- ished.
23 3. User Tools (System Settings) User T ools Menu (S ystem Se ttings) Refere nce For det ails about Inter face Setti ngs and Fil e Transfer, see “ User T ools Menu (System Settings ) ” , Netw ork G uid e . For deta ils about pa ralle l inter face, see “ System Setti ngs (Parallel Connec- tion) ” , Pr inte r R efe ren ce 2 .
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 24 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Timer Settings (See p.31 “ Ti mer Setti ngs ” .) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Interface Settings • For detai ls about networ k settings, see Netwo rk Gu ide . • For detai ls about para llel interf ace, see P rinter R eference 2 .
User Tool s Menu (System Set tings) 25 3 Prog ram/ Chan ge User Code Prog ram — Chan ge — Del ete — Address Book:Print Li st Destination List — Group Destination Li st — Quick Dial Label — AOF (Always On ) On Default (MFP) Default (Copier onl y) StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 26 3 Acces sing U ser Too ls ( System Setti ngs) This sectio n is for key operat ors in char ge of th is machi ne. User Tool s allow you to change or set defa ult s. Note ❒ Operations for syst em settings dif- fer from normal operations.
Acces sing User Tools ( System Set tings) 27 3 Quitting User Tools A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. ABU205S StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 28 3 Settings You C an Change with User Tools Refere nce To access User Tools, see p.26 “ Accessing User Tools (System Set tings) ” . Genera l Feature s ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Pane l Tone The bee per (key to ne) sounds when a key is pr essed.
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 29 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Measurement Un it You can switch the measurement betw een “ mm ” an d “ inch ” . Note ❒ Defa ult: Metri c ve rsion: mm ❒ Inch ve rsion: inch Tray Pape r Settings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Tray P aper Size: Tray 1 – 2 Sele ct the size of th e paper loade d in the p aper tray .
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 30 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Type: Tray 1 – 2 Set the d isplay so you c an see what typ e of paper is loaded in each paper tray. The p rint func tion us es th is infor mation to auto mati cally se lect th e paper tray .
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 31 3 Timer Settings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Off Timer After a specified pe riod has passed, fo llowing j ob completion, t he machine auto matical ly turn s off, in or der to con serve en ergy. This func tion i s called “ Auto Off ” .
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 32 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copier Au to Reset Timer Spe cify the time to el apse b efo re co pier m ode rese ts. Note ❒ If [ Off ] is selected , the machine does not automatically sw itch to t he user code entr y screen. ❒ Default: On , 60 sec.
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 33 3 Key Ope rator Tools The key operator m ust set the followin g items (for se ttings or m ore information, contact the key operato r): We recom mend that the key operator progr am a key operator code when mak- ing settings.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 34 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Extende d Securi ty Speci fy whethe r or not to u se the sec urity function. Note ❒ Default : Of f ❒ You have to set a 6 -d igit key operator code to enable Extended Se curity. See p.33 “ Ke y Oper ator Code ” .
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 35 3 D Sel ect [ Display /Print Counter ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Press [ Pr int ] . F Press the { { { { Star t } } } } key. G Press the { { { { User Tool s/Counter } } } } key.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 36 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Address Book Managemen t You ca n add, c hange, or dele te user inf orm atio n in the A ddress Book, and fac- simile/scanner functions dest inations. For d etails abo ut th ese ope ration s, see p .
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 37 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Program/Chang e/Delete Group You can reg ister mult iple users in a gr oup. This allows you to easily con trol re gistere d use rs in each gr oup. For details about operations, see p.62 “ Registering Destinations to a Group ” .
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 38 3 User C ode (For mac hines with co pier function only) Regi ster user codes to rest rict copier functions to certain users, an d check on t heir use of copier func tions. Regis tering a New User Code A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
User Code (For machines with c opier f unction only) 39 3 Changin g a User Code Note ❒ Even if you c hange a user code, the coun ter value w ill not be cleare d.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 40 3 F F F F Sel ect [ Per User Code ] or [ All User Codes ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Wh en s elect ing [ All User Co des ] , a confirmation message appear s.
User Code (For machines with c opier f unction only) 41 3 Printing the Counter for Each User Code Yo u can p rint out the co unter for ea ch user cod e.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 42 3 Address Book Registe ring user info rmation, su ch as fax numbers and e-mail addresses, in the Ad dress Book al lows you to man- age t hem toge ther . Importa nt ❒ Address Book data is stored in memory. It can be lost if the re is s o m e k i n d o f m e m o r y f a i l u r e .
Address Book 43 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Items to register • User Nam e Refe re nce p.43 “ Registe ring the desti - nation name ” p.44 “ Registe ring S ender In- form a tio n ” • Fax Settings Refe re nce p.43 “ When usi ng the fax fun c tio n ” • E-mail Se ttings Refe re nce p.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 44 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When using the scan ner functio n • E-mai l Register e-mail addresses in the Addres s Book. To send sc an files by e-mail, se lect the desti- nation from th e Destination List, so you can specify t he e- mail a ddress.
User C ode (MFP) 45 3 User Code (M FP) Register user c odes to rest rict the fol- lowing functi ons to certain users, and chec k their u se of each function : • Copier • Facsim ile • Scanner • Printer Note ❒ The number of copies scanned in using the scanner functi on is count ed for e ach us er co de.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 46 3 E E E E Sel ect [ P rogram/ Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . F F F F Enter the registration n umber you want to program using the number keys or th e Quick Dial key s, an d th en pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
User C ode (MFP) 47 3 E E E E Sel ect [ P rogram/ Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . F F F F Pre ss [ Search ] . Note ❒ You ca n also enter the reg istra- tion number of the user (desti- nation) using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 48 3 Deleti ng a Use r Code A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ Sy stem Se tti ngs ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
User C ode (MFP) 49 3 M M M M Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. Displaying the Counter for Each User Code You can check the counter made un- der each functi on's u ser co de. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 50 3 Note ❒ Repe at thi s ste p whe n you wa nt to print more th an one counte r. C Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
User C ode (MFP) 51 3 Note ❒ Repe at thi s ste p whe n you want to clear more than one counte r. C Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. A confir mation messa ge ap- pear s. D Press [ Yes ] . The “ Counter ha s been cle ared. ” message appear s, and then the Codes: C ounters display re turns.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 52 3 Fax De stinat ion Register fax destinations, so you do not need to enter them each ti me, and can send documents scanned in using the fax function. • It is easy to select the fax destina- tion if you regi ster a “ User (Destina- tion ) Na me ” for the fax destination.
Fax Destinat ion 53 3 E E E E Sel ect [ P rogram/ Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . F F F F Enter the registration n umber you want to program using the number keys or th e Quick Dial key s, an d th en pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 54 3 C Sele ct [ On ] or [ Of f ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and th en press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Fax Destinat ion 55 3 G G G G Sel ect [ D ispl ay Desti nation List ] us - ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } ke y. H H H H Select th e fax destinat ion user you w ant to cha nge us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 56 3 F F F F Pre ss [ Search ] . Note ❒ You ca n also enter the reg istra- tion number of the user (desti- nation) using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys. After en- tering the number, press the { { { { OK } } } } key, and then proceed to step I .
E-ma il D est inatio n 57 3 E-ma il Des tinat ion Register e -mail destinations, so you do not need t o enter e-mail ad dresses ev ery ti me, and c an s end sca n fil es b y e- mail, or s end f ax do cume nts by In- ternet Fax.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 58 3 F F F F Enter the registration n umber you want to program using the number keys or th e Quick Dial key s, an d th en pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Enter the user (destinati on) name using t he number keys a nd the Quick Di al keys, and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key.
E-ma il D est inatio n 59 3 M M M M Ente r the se nder 's pass word us - ing the nu mber keys , and then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Note ❒ You can enter up t o eight digits. N N N N Pre ss t he { { { { Cancel } } } } key. O O O O Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 60 3 J J J J Pre ss [ Dest. ] . K K K K Sel ect [ E-mail Settings ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. L L L L Enter the ne w e-mail addres s us- ing the number keys and the Quick Di al keys, and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key.
E-ma il D est inatio n 61 3 Note ❒ Sel ect [ Prog ram/Change ] if you want to delete only the e-mail address . ❒ Sel ect [ Delet e ] if you want to de- lete all us er in for mat io n. F F F F Pre ss [ Search ] . Note ❒ You ca n also enter the reg istra- tion number of the user (desti- nation) using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 62 3 Regi stering Dest inations to a Group Register d estinations to a group to easi ly contr ol reg ist ered fa x and e- mai l addr ess for e ach g rou p. To group d estinations, the group s must be registered beforehand .
Register ing De stination s to a Group 63 3 H H H H Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The “ Programmed ” me ssage ap- pears, and then the “ Grou p ” dis- play r eturn s. I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. Regis tering a Destina tion to a Group A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 64 3 K K K K Sel ect [ Program Group ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . L L L L Select the group name to whic h you want to register using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then check it using { { { {V V V V} } } } .
Register ing De stination s to a Group 65 3 J J J J Pre ss [ Dest. ] . K K K K Sel ect [ Program Group ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key .
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 66 3 Refe re nce For details about entering text, see p.83 “ Entering Text ” . C Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. D Select the group you wa nt to display u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then p ress th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing De stination s to a Group 67 3 Changin g a Grou p Name A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ Sy stem Se tti ngs ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key .
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 68 3 Searching to select a registered group by registration number A Sele ct [ Searc h by Registra tion No. ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing De stination s to a Group 69 3 B Enter the character s of the des- tination you want to delet e us- ing the number keys a nd the Quick Di al keys, and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Refe re nce For details about entering text, see p.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 70 3 Usin g the Search Functi on to Select a Dest inat ion Yo u can use the search function to s e- lect a registered dest ination by name, registered number, user code, fax numb er or e-m ail address. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
Usin g the Sea rch Funct ion to Select a Desti nation 71 3 D Select the u ser (destination) you want to change or delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered destination by regis tration number A Sele ct [ Searc h by Registra tion No.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 72 3 Searching to select a registered destination by f ax number A Sele ct [ Se arch by Fax No. ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
73 4. Troubleshooting If Your Mac hine Does Not Oper ate As You Want The following chart gives explanatio n s of common pr oblems and m essages. If other messages appear, follo w t he instruct ions displayed. Note ❒ For further “ Trou bleshoo tin g ” , refer to the ot her man uals for this machin e.
Troubl eshootin g 74 4 Canno t print in duplex mode. You cannot use pap er in the bypass tray for duplex prin ting . For dup lex printing, selec t Tray 1-2 in copier m ode or with the printer driver. [ Off ] is selected for [ Duplex ] in Paper Type : Tray 1-2.
x Cleari ng Misfeeds 75 4 x x x x Clearing Misfee ds R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ When clearing mi sfeeds, do no t turn off the p ower switch. If you d o, your copy setting s are cleared. ❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the ma- chi ne.
Troubl eshootin g 76 4 displa yed displa yed displa yed ABU040S StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.b ook Page 76 Mo nday, December 22, 2003 2:15 PM.
Changi ng the Paper Si ze 77 4 Changing the Paper Size Prep arat io n Be sur e to se lect the pape r size w i t h U s e r T o o l s . I f y o u d o n o t , m i s - feed s might occur. See p.29 “ Tray Pa per Si ze :Tra y 1 – 2 ” . Refere nce For deta ils about p aper sizes a n d type s, see p.
Troubl eshootin g 78 4 F F F F Square the pa per and loa d it in the t r ay. Import ant ❒ B e s ur e t o lo ad th e p ape r un de r the roller. ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ar k. G G G G While pressing th e release lever, adjust the side fences to the new pape r s ize.
Changi ng the Paper Si ze 79 4 When loading 8 1 / 4 " × 14" L or 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L size paper A Pull the ba ck fence off from the tray. B Place i t in the cor ner pocket on the left. D D D D While pressing th e release lever, adjust the side fe nces.
Troubl eshootin g 80 4 Sele cting the Paper Siz e with User Tools A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ Sy stem Se tti ngs ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key .
81 5. Other Function Other Function Displaying the Total Counter You can display t he tot al coun ter val- ue us e d for all function s. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ Counter ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Other Func tion 82 5 StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.b ook Page 82 Mo nday, December 22, 2003 2:15 PM.
83 6. Entering Text Ent erin g T ext This sec tion describ es how to enter characte rs. When you enter a chara c- ter, it appears at the curs or position. I f there is a character alr eady at the cur- sor position, the ne wly entered char- acter app ears before it.
Enteri ng Text 84 6 Entering letters A A A A Pr ess t he { { { { Shift } } } } key to switch be- tween uppe rcase and lowerc ase. B B B B Pre ss a Qui ck Di al key s. A letter is entered and the curs or moves along one sp ace. Note ❒ To enter a charact er repeatedly, repe at s tep B .
85 7. Security Secur ity Confidential informati on is always at risk of being copied without permission or subjec t to un authori zed acces s through the ne twork. T o protec t doc uments fr om su ch i ntr usi on, not on ly can pass wo rds be se t, bu t also th e Ext en ded Sec uri ty function c an be used to strengt hen security.
Security 86 7 A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ Syst em Set tin gs ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Sel ect [ Key Operator Tools ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Operatin g Enviro nment and Notes 87 7 Operating Environment and Notes Secu rity for this mach ine is assured o n the premi ses that the mach ine is us ed un- der th e followin g conditi ons: Op erati ng E nvi ronm ent • The cond ition of the mach ine is norm al.
Security 88 7 StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.b ook Page 88 Mo nday, December 22, 2003 2:15 PM.
89 8. Specifications Main Unit ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Co nfigu ra tion: Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photosensitiv ity t ype: OPC drum ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original s canning: One-dimensional solid scanning system thr.
Specific ations 90 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Co py pap er size : • Tray : A4 L , B5 JI S L , A 5 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L , 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " K , 16K L • Bypass: A4 L , A5 KL , B5 J.
Main Unit 91 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy paper capacity: • Tray 1: 250 sheets ( 80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) • Bypass: 100 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power consumpt ion: *1 Main uni t with th e ADF, fax un it, printer/sc anner unit, and paper tray unit.
Specific ations 92 8 Other Items Auto Document Feeder (ADF) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode : • ADF mode ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig inal si ze: • A4 L – A5 KL • 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L – 5 1 / 2 " .
Other It ems 93 8 Paper Tr ay Unit (Tra y 2) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper weight: 60 – 90 g/m 2 (16 – 24 lb.) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper size: A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14 " L , 8 1 / 2 " × 13".
Specific ations 94 8 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Ty pes The fo llo wing li mitat ions a pply to each tr ay: *1 Paper weight: 80 g /m 2 , 20 lb *2 When yo u set custom size paper in the b ypass tray, You can specify the size. See Copy Reference .
Copy Pape r 95 8 Importa nt ❒ If you use damp or cu rled paper, a misfeed might occ ur. In such a case, try turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement, chang e to copy paper wit h less cur l. Note ❒ When u sing the bypass tray , we recom mend you set the c opy pap er directio n to L .
Specific ations 96 8 Note ❒ Do not use any of the fol lowing ki nds of paper or a mi sfeed might occu r. • Bent, folded, or cr eased pa per • Tor n paper • Slip pery pape r • Perforat ed pap.
97 INDEX A Accessing Use r Tools (Syst em Settings) , 26 Addres s Book , 42 Print List , 37 Addres s Book Manag ement , 36 ADF , 13 , 92 AOF (Alw ays O n) , 37 Auto Doc ument Feed er , 13 , 92 Auto of.
98 K Key Coun ter Mana gemen t , 33 Key Operator Code , 33 Key Operator Tools , 33 Key Repeat , 28 L Lowe r right cove r , 12 M Main power i ndicator , 11 Main po wer swit ch , 11 Main un it , 89 Meas.
99 MEMO StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.b ook Page 99 Mo nday, December 22, 2003 2:15 PM.
100 AE AE B129-67 08 MEMO StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.b ook Page 100 Mond ay, December 22, 2003 2 :15 PM.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =108 // P rint sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.32 0000 mm In acc ordance wi th IEC 6 0417, thi s machi ne uses t he foll owing symbo ls for th e main power swit ch: a a a a means POWE R ON.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =108 // P rint sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.20 0000 mm 1515/1515PS/1515F/1 515MF Operatin g Instructions C opy Reference RIC OH COM PANY, LT D.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
i Manuals f or This Machine The follow ing manuals descr ibe the operatio nal procedures of thi s machine. For particular functions, see the r e levant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are sp ecific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBi nder V2 Lite DeskTopB inder V2 Li te i s a utilit y includ ed on the CD-ROM labe led "S canner Dr iver & Do cume nt M ana ge men t U til itie s".
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manua ls for This Mach ine .... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... .... i Notice ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ...
iv 3. Trou bleshooting If Your Mac hine Does Not Op erate As You Want... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ........ ... 33 When a Message Is Displayed ...... ....... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ........ 33 If You Can not Make Clear Co pies.
1 Notice Import ant Do no t make c opies of any item for which cop ying is proh ibited by la w. Copyin g the followin g items is norma lly prohi bited by lo cal law: Bank billes, revenue st amps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, pass- por ts, driv er 's l ice nses .
2 How to Read This Manual Symb ols The follow ing set of symbols is us ed in this m anual. R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machin e without following t he in- str uction s unde r thi s symb ol.
3 Safety Information When using this machin e, the following safety p recautions shou ld always be fol- lowed. Safet y During Operat ion In th is m anu al, the follow ing imp orta nt sy mbols a re us .
4 R CAUT ION: • Protect the ma chine from dam pness or wet weather, such as rain and snow. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machin e. While m oving the machin e, you should take care that t he power cord will no t be damag ed under t he machin e.
5 Posit ions of R R R R WARNING and R R R R CAUTION Label s Th is m ach ine ha s la bels for R WARN ING and R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, please fo llow the instructio ns and handle the machine as indi cated . The i nside o f this ma chine gets ver y hot.
6 Note ❒ The anti-co ndensation heater is optional. For details, contact your service rep- resent ative. StellaC2_GBcopy_F1_pr e_FM.book Page 6 Tues day, December 16, 2003 4:39 PM.
7 Control Panel ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Co pier on ly ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax, printer and /or scanner installed 1. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to act ivate the c opier fu nction. 2. Indica tors Display errors a nd machine status. • h : Error indicator See “ Control Panel ” , Gen eral Setti ngs Guide .
8 10. On indi cato r Lights when th e operation switch is on. Refere nce p.10 “ Turni ng On the Power ” 11. Op eration switch Press to turn the power on. The On indi- cator lights. To turn the pow er off, press agai n. Note ❒ This key is inac tivate during scanning or while setting defaults.
9 Reading the Display a nd Using Keys The displa y is not touch sensitive. Use the follow ing keys to select the keys and items displayed on the screen.
10 Turning On the Po wer This mac hine has two po wer swit ch- es. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Operation swi tch (right side of the co ntro l pane l) Press to activate the machine.
11 Tu rning Off th e Powe r A A A A Mak e sure the exposu re gl ass co v- er, or ADF (Auto D ocument Feed- er) is in the right position. B B B B Press the operation switch.
12 Saving Ene rgy • Low Powe r/Auto Off The machine automatically enters Low Power mode au tomatically after a job is finis hed, an d the se- lecte d time elaps ed. After a s pec ified per iod h as passed, follow ing job comple tion, the ma chine auto matic ally tur ns off, in ord er to conserve ener gy.
13 1. Placing Original s Orig inals Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version Note ❒ Abo u t 30 or ig inal s c an be pl ace d in t he ADF .
Placing Ori ginals 14 1 Note ❒ The ori ginal might bec ome dirt y if it is writt en with a penci l or a sim ilar tool. Size s Selectab le as Regular Size Original s Yo u ca n se lec t t he f oll owi.
Placin g Originals 15 1 Placing Or iginals Note ❒ Take care to plac e orig ina ls onl y af- ter any cor rection fluid and ink has comp letely dri ed. Not ta king this prec auti on cou ld cau se marks on the exposure glass that will be cop- ied o nto pap er.
Placing Ori ginals 16 1 Plac ing Original s in the ADF Note ❒ Do not stack or iginals o ver the li m- it mark on the side fence of the ADF. ❒ The last page should be on th e bot- tom. ❒ Do not place anything on the ADF cover, doin g so co uld cau se a m al- function.
Placin g Originals 17 1 D D D D Select the paper size using the scrol l keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The “ Acce pted ” mess age appears. When the regul ar size orig inals settings are reg istered, appears at the top of t he copy dis- play.
Placing Ori ginals 18 1 D D D D Enter the horizontal size of the original using th e number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ If you make a mistake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, and then ent er the value again.
19 2. Copying Basi c Proce dure A A A A If t he machi ne has u ser co des se t, enter a use r code (up to eight dig- its) using t he number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. The m achine i s ready to co py. Refere nce For user codes, see “ Key Opera - tor Tools ” , Gene ral Settings Guide .
Copying 20 2 Copying fr om the Bypass Tray Use th e byp ass tray to copy onto O HP transp arencies , thick pa per, en ve- lopes and copy paper that cannot be loaded in the paper tray s. Importa nt ❒ Paper of 357 mm in length, or larg- er, is l ikely to jam, cr ease, or not feed in pr operly .
Copyi ng from the Bypass Tr ay 21 2 C C C C Insert the pape r with the side you want to copy facing down, and then adjust the paper guide with the pape r size. 1. Horiz ontal size 2. Vertical size 3. Extende r 4. Paper guid es Note ❒ If the guides are not flush against the copy paper, images might be skew ed or paper mis- feeds might occu r.
Copying 22 2 When copying onto regular siz e paper A A A A Make sur e the bypa ss t ray i s se - lected. Note ❒ If any ot her paper tray is select- ed, usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } to sele ct the bypass tray. B B B B Pre ss t he { { { { # } } } } key .
Copyi ng from the Bypass Tr ay 23 2 F F F F Enter the vertical size of the origi- nal using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Acce pted ” mess age appears. When copying onto special pap er A A A A Make sur e the bypa ss t ray i s se - lected.
Copying 24 2 E E E E Select the envelope si ze from [ C6 env L L L L ] [ C5 en v L L L L ] [ DL env L L L L ] , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copi er Functions 25 2 Copier Functi ons Adjustin g Im age Density You can adjust co py image de nsity to match yo ur origina ls. If you require darker or lighter cop- ies, adjust image density accordingly. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Lighter } } } } or { { { { Darker } } } } key to adjust the density.
Copying 26 2 Sele cting Copy Paper Choose t he tray containing th e paper you want to copy onto : a pa per tr ay or the bypass tray. A A A A Select the pa per tray or by pass tray using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . The selected tray and the p aper size appear.
Copi er Functions 27 2 C C C C Select a ratio using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Acce pted ” mess age appears. D D D D Place your originals, and then pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key.
Copying 28 2 Sor t You ca n scan origina ls into me mory and automatical ly so rt copies. Copies are assembled as sequentiall y orde red s ets. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Sort } } } } key. Note ❒ When c anceling th e Sort func- tio n, pr ess the { { { { Sor t } } } } key, and make sure the { { { { Sort } } } } key in dica- tor is of f.
Copi er Functions 29 2 Duplex ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ 1 Sided → → → → 2 Sided Copies 2 one-sided p ages onto 1 two-s ided p age. Original o rientation and comple ted copies Th e resu lting copy i mage will di ffer accord ing to the o rientation in which you p lace the o riginals (vertical K or horizontal L ).
Copying 30 2 B Select the cop y orient ation us - ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , a nd then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The “ Accepted ” m essage ap- pear s. B B B B Place your originals. When placing originals on the exposure glass A Place the original, and then press t he { { { { Sta rt } } } } key.
Copi er Functions 31 2 To select the orient ation Note ❒ You ca n select t he orig inal or i- entation when [ Alwa ys Spec ify ] is selected in [ Orie ntation ] under [ Copier Features ] (User To ols).
Copying 32 2 To select the orient ation Note ❒ You ca n select t he orig inal or i- entation when [ Alwa ys Spec ify ] is selected in [ Orie ntation ] under [ Copier Features ] (User To ols).
33 3. Troubleshooting If Your Mac hine Does Not Oper ate As You Want When a Messa ge Is Displa yed The follow ing chart contains explanations for commo n messages. If other mes- sages appear, foll ow the instr uctions as they are displayed. Note ❒ For messages not listed here, see Genera l Settings Guide .
Troubl eshootin g 34 3 If You Cannot Make Clear C opies Pro blem C ause s Sol uti ons Copies appear di rty. Image density is too dark . Adjust the image d ensity. See p.25 “ Adjusting Image Density ” . The re verse side of an orig - inal image is copied.
If You Cannot Make Copi es As Yo u Want 35 3 If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want This secti on explains causes and rem edies whe n copy results are not as expec t- ed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Basic ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Combine ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Duplex Pro blem C ause s Sol uti ons You cannot combi ne seve r- al fu nc tio ns.
Troubl eshootin g 36 3 When Memor y Is Full Me ssage s Caus es So lution s Memor y is ful l. [Pr int] sc anne d orig. , [Clear ] to can cel/cle ar memor y. [ Clear ][ Print ] Note ❒ Copying will stop an d this message will be displaye d when the memor y is full.
B Loadi ng Paper 37 3 B B B B Loading Paper Refere nce For paper types and s izes, see Gen- eral Settings Guide . Loading Pa per Note ❒ You can change the paper size, see General Setti ngs Guide . ❒ Th is illu str ati on sh ows Tr ay 1. A A A A Pull the paper tray out slowly un- til it stops.
Troubl eshootin g 38 3 D D D D Adding Toner Whe n D appea rs, it is time to add ton er. Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ Faults may oc cur if you use t oner other t han the reco mmended type. ❒ When add ing toner, do not turn o ff the operation sw itch.
Removi ng Toner 39 3 Removing Toner • 1: Open the fron t cover of th e machine. • 2: Lift the green l ever. • 3: Push the green le ver, and then gentl y pull out th e holder. • 4: Press the toner bottle back to raise its top, and th en gently pull it out.
Troubl eshootin g 40 3 Inserting Toner • 1: Hold the new bo ttle horizontally and shake it from side to si de five or six times. 2: Remove the black cap. Note ❒ Do not remove the black cap befor e sha king . ❒ Do not remove the inner c ap. • 3: Put the toner bottle on the holder, and then p ull its top for ward.
41 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Acces sing U ser Too ls ( Copier Features) This sectio n is for key operat ors in charg e of this ma chine. Key op erator s can change o r make default settings. Note ❒ B e s u r e t o q u i t U s e r T o o l s a n d r e - turn to the i nitia l cop y dis play when all setting s are complete.
User Tool s (Copier Fea tures) 42 4 D D D D Change settings by following in- struc tions on th e display , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Programmed ” me ssage ap- pears. Note ❒ To discontinu e the operation and r eturn to the initia l disp lay, press the { { { { User T ools/C ounter } } } } key.
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 43 4 Settings You C an Change with User Tools Auto Tray Switching If you load paper of the same size and in the s ame orien tation in tw o trays, the machine autom atically shifts to the ot her tray when the first tray ru ns out of paper.
User Tool s (Copier Fea tures) 44 4 Orie ntat ion • You can sel ect the or igin al or ienta - tion when maki ng Combine cop- ies. Note ❒ Default: D o not Speci fy ❒ When you sel ect [ Alw ays S pecify ] , you must sele ct the orientation of ori gin als.
Settings You C an Change w ith User Tools 45 4 Prese t R/E Priority You can set the ratio with priority when [ R/E ] is select ed. Note ❒ Default: • Metr ic ver sion: 71% • Inch ve rsion: 65% Dup lex M arg in You can specify left margin on the b ack si de of co pie s, an d top marg in on t he fr ont sid e.
User Tool s (Copier Fea tures) 46 4 Ste llaC2_G Bcopy _F1_pr e_FM.bo ok Page 46 Tues day, D ecembe r 16, 2003 4: 39 PM.
47 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ Do no t turn the power off whi le the On indicato r is lit or blinking. Doi ng so ma y da mage th e memo- ry. ❒ Before unpluggi ng the pow er cord or turni ng off the main pow er switch, make sure remainin g memory space is at 100% , as shown on th e display.
Remarks 48 5 Where to Put Y our Machine Mach ine E nviro nmen t Choo se you r machi ne's locat ion c are- fully. Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance . Optimum environ mental condition s R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: • Temperatur e: 10-32 ° C (50-89.
Where to Put Your Machine 49 5 Moving R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ Be careful w hen moving the m a- chine. Tak e the followi ng precau- tions: • Turn o ff the main po wer. S ee p.1 1 “ Turnin g Off the M ain Power ” . • Unplu g the power co rd from the wall outle t.
Remarks 50 5 Access to t he Ma chin e Plac e th e mach ine ne ar th e power source, p roviding the clearance areas shown. 1. Rear : 1 cm ( 0.4 ") o r mor e 2. Right: 1 cm (0 .4") or more 3. Front: 75 cm (29.6") or more 4. Left: 1 cm (0.
Main taini ng Y our Ma chine 51 5 Maintain ing Your Machine If the exposure glass, exposure g lass c ov e r , or A D F b el t is d i r ty , c o p y c l a ri - ty may be reduced. Clean these p arts if they ar e dirty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machin e Wipe the machine with a soft, damp clot h.
Remarks 52 5 Ste llaC2_G Bcopy _F1_pr e_FM.bo ok Page 52 Tues day, D ecembe r 16, 2003 4: 39 PM.
53 6. Specifications Combinatio n Chart The combination chart below shows which functions can be used together. When you read the chart, see the follow ing table: The follow in g shows the com bin ation s of fun cti ons. ❍ These functions can be use d together.
Specific ations 54 6 Suppleme ntary Informat ion ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bypass T ray Copy • The following paper sizes can be selected as standard sizes: A4 L , A5 KL , B5 JIS L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14".
Suppl ementary I nformati on 55 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Zoom • The r eprod uction ratios you c an sp ecify a re 50 – 200%. • You ca n select a rat io regard less of the size of an or iginal or copy pape r. With some ra tios, par ts of th e ima ge might not b e copi ed or margins wi ll appear on copies.
Specific ations 56 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Combine • When usi ng this f unction, the ma chine selec ts the reprod uction r atio aut o- matica lly. Th is r epro duction rati o depe nds on origi nal si zes, i f specif ied, or copy pape r sizes .
57 INDEX 1 sided 2 pa ges → com bine 1 side , 30 1 sided 4 pa ges → com bine 2 side , 31 1 sided → 2 s ide d , 29 A Accessi ng User Tools , 41 Adding to ner , 38 ADF , 16 Adj us ting im age d en.
58 P Pap er loading , 37 Pho to , 25 Placi ng custom s ize origin als , 17 Pla cin g or igin al s , 15 in ADF , 16 on exposu re glass , 15 Placi ng regular size ori ginals , 16 Pow er , 10 Pow er co n.
59 MEMO Ste llaC2_G Bcopy _F1_pr e_FM.bo ok Page 59 Tues day, D ecembe r 16, 2003 4: 39 PM.
60 GB GB B129- 6600 MEMO Ste llaC2_G Bcopy _F1_pr e_FM.bo ok Page 60 Tues day, D ecembe r 16, 2003 4: 39 PM.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.20 0000 mm 1515/1515PS/1515F/1 515MF Operatin g Instructions C opy Reference RIC OH COM PANY, LT D.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Operat ing Instruc tion.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Decl aration o f Confor.
i Manuals f or This Machine The follow ing manuals descr ibe the operational pro cedures of thi s machine. For particular functions, see the r e levant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals pr ovided are sp ecific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBi nder V2 Lite Des kT opB inde r V 2 L ite is a ut ilit y i nclud ed on t he CD- RO M l abe led “ Scanner Dr iver & Do cume nt M ana ge men t U til itie s ” .
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manua ls for This Machin e .... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... .... i How to Rea d This Manua l . ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... .....
iv Stel laC2-G B-Pre f1-F3_FM _ZF.bo ok Page iv Fr iday, N ovembe r 21, 2003 8: 42 PM.
1 How to Read This Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This sym bol indicates a potentially hazard ous situation wh ich, if instru ctions ar e n ot fo llow ed , c ould re sult in de ath or se riou s in jury .
2 Names of Major Comp onents and Soft ware The follow ing software p roducts are referred to using a gen eral name: • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder V2 professiona l → DeskTop- Bin der V2.
3 1. Getting Started Control Panel 1. { { { { Printer } } } } key Press to act ivate the printer function. 2. Indica tors Displays errors and ma chine status. h : Error indicator. S ee N etw or k Guid e and General Settings Guide . B : Load Paper indicato r.
Getti ng Started 4 1 Reading t he Disp lay an d Using Keys This section explains how to read the display and using the sel ection key for th e initia l displ ay. Note ❒ The co py dis play is set as the d efa ult sc reen whe n the m achine i s turned on.
5 2. Prepar ing to Print This secti on gives instructions for conne cting the machi ne and compute r, config- uring th e machine, an d installing software.
Prepari ng to Print 6 2 Preparing the Machine Conn ecti ng the Machi ne Refere nce For in formation ab out connection using Ethe rnet and w ireless LAN, see "Confirming the Connection", Net work Guid e . For informa tion about connection using Blue tooth TM , see the manual that comes w ith t he optiona l Blu e- tooth inter face uni t.
Prepari ng the Machine 7 2 Connecting the Machi ne to the host using the paral lel cable/IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) cable Connect the mac hine to the host com- puter us ing the optional IEEE 128 4 in- terface boa rd or optional IEEE 1394 int erfac e boar d.
Prepari ng to Print 8 2 Sett ing Paper on the Bypas s Tra y This se ction giv es inst ruction s for se t- ting p aper on the bypass tray. U se the byp ass tra y to print ont o OHP tran s- parenc ies, labels , thick pap er, and en- vel opes th at cann ot be loade d in the paper t ray.
Prepari ng the Machine 9 2 C C C C Gent ly inse rt paper fa ce do wn into the bypass tray. 1. Extende r 2. Paper guid es Note ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it mark, otherwise a skewed im - age or mis feed s mi ght oc cur. ❒ Open ou t the extende r to sup- port pape r size s larger than A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L .
Prepari ng to Print 10 2 D Sele ct [ Bypass Pap er Si ze ] , and then p ress th e { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the paper s ize using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and th en pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ When pr inting onto thick p a- per or OHP transp arencie s, sele ct th e pap er ty pe .
Prepari ng the Machine 11 2 G G G G Enter the horizontal size of the pape r usi ng t he numb er key s, an d then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. Settin g thick paper or OHP transparencies Note ❒ Paper settin g s can also be set using the p rinter driver.
Prepari ng to Print 12 2 Setting envelopes A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ Sy stem Se tti ngs ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key .
Insta lling the Sof tware 13 2 Installing t he Software This manual assumes you ar e familiar with general Windows procedures and practices. If you are not, see th e operating instruct ions that co me w ith Windows for details. The procedure for installing the pr int- er driver depends on the connectio n with the co mpu ter.
Prepari ng to Print 14 2 The fo llow ing table show s the pr inte r drive rs and sof tware th at can be in- stalled using Au to Run: *1 Available operating systems are: Win- dows 95/98 /Me, Windows 2000 /XP, Windows Se rver 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. Au to Run i s unav ailable w ith Macin tosh.
Insta lling the Sof tware 15 2 Importa nt ❒ If your system is Windows NT 4.0, we recommend that you u pgrade the W indows NT 4. 0 oper ating s y s t e m t o S e r v i c e P a c k 4 o r l a t e r before installing the PCL 6/5e or RPCS ™ printer driv ers.
Prepari ng to Print 16 2 • Win dows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 On the [ Start ] menu, clic k [ Printers and Fax es ] . Th e [ Print- ers and Fa xes ] win dow ap- pears. R ight-click th e mach ine icon , a nd th en cli ck [ Rename ] . • Windows XP H ome Edition On th e [ Start ] men u, click [ Control P anel ] .
Insta lling the Sof tware 17 2 • Window s NT 4.0 PCL 6: DRIVERSPCL 6 NT4(Language)DIS K1 PCL 5e: DRIVERSPCL5E NT4(Language)DIS K1 RPCS ™ : DRIVE RSRPCS NT4(Language)DIS K1 A A A A Quit all applications running. B B B B Insert the CD -ROM into the CD- ROM drive.
Prepari ng to Print 18 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Net BE U I A Click [ NetBEUI ] , and then clic k [ Se arch ] . A li st of mac hin es tha t can be use d with NetBEU I ap- pears. B Select the mach ine you want to use, a nd then c lick [ OK ] . Note ❒ NetBE UI canno t be used under Wind ows XP or Windows Server 2003.
Insta lling the Sof tware 19 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ User Co de User codes ar e eight digit c odes that allow you to keep tra ck of printing d one unde r each code. To us e this featur e, the netwo rk administ rator should ass ign user codes and inform users of them be fore they i nstall the print er drive r.
Prepari ng to Print 20 2 Note ❒ If you cannot set the items on the [ Recover y/Parallel Printin g ] tab, follow th e proced ure be- low. A Click [ Canc el ] to c lose the [ Port Se ttings ] dialo g box . B Start S martDeviceMonitor for Cli ent, and t hen right- click the SmartDevice- Monito r for Cli ent icon o n the ta skbar .
Insta lling the Sof tware 21 2 RPCS ™ prin ter dri ver A A A A On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Se t- tings ] , and then cli ck [ Printe rs ] . The [ Pri nter s ] window ap pears. Note ❒ If using Windows XP Profes- sional or Windows Server 200 3, clic k the [ Print ers and Faxes ] win- dow on the [ Sta rt ] men u.
Prepari ng to Print 22 2 Note ❒ The prin ter driver with t he se- le cted langu age will b e in - stalled . ❒ The pri nter dri ver will be in- stalled in English if you se lect the following languages: Cesti- na, Magya r, Polski , Portu gues, Suom i, a nd Russ ian.
Insta lling the Sof tware 23 2 A A A A Quit all application s that are run- ni ng. B B B B Insert the CD -ROM into the CD- ROM drive. Auto Run will st art the install er.
Prepari ng to Print 24 2 A A A A On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Se t- tings ] , and then cli ck [ Printe rs ] . The [ Pri nter s ] window ap pears. Note ❒ In Window s XP Profe ssional or Windows Server 2003, cl ick the [ Printers and Faxes ] wind ow on the [ Sta rt ] menu.
Insta lling the Sof tware 25 2 Note ❒ The prin ter driver with t he se- le cted langu age will b e in - stalled . ❒ The pri nter dri ver will be in- stalled in English if you se lect the following languages: Cesti- na, Magya r, Polski , Portu gues, Suom i, a nd Russ ian.
Prepari ng to Print 26 2 • When bidire ctiona l transmission is runni ng, machi ne statu s and info r- mati on can be viewed by opening the p rinter driver scr een. To s upport b idire ction al tra nsm is- sion, the following co nditions are re- quire d: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When connecti ng with USB 2.
Insta lling the Sof tware 27 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When co nnecting with a parallel cable • The co mputer m ust supp ort bi- direc tional tran smission. • The ma chine must be set to bi di- rect ional transm ission.
Prepari ng to Print 28 2 C C C C In the [ Select a Pos tScr ipt Printe r: ] list, cl ick the name of th e machine you w ant to use. D D D D Click [ Setup ] . E E E E Click [ Select PP D... ] . F F F F Click the p rinter description file you want to use, and then click [ Sele ct ] .
Insta lling the Sof tware 29 2 Installing screen fonts A A A A Start t he Macintosh. B B B B Insert the CD -ROM into the CD- ROM drive. C C C C Double-click the CD-ROM icon. D D D D Do ub le -c li ck the [ Mac O S 8 an d 9 ] folder. E E E E Do ub le -c lic k t h e [ Fonts ] folder.
Prepari ng to Print 30 2 Inst alling the Pr inter Driver Using USB This se ction gi ves bas ic instruc tions for i nst alli ng prin ter driv ers us ing USB.
Insta lling the Sof tware 31 2 Windows 2000/XP and Wi ndows Server 2003 - Installing the printer driver using USB Limitati on ❒ Insta lling a printer driver require s the Administrators permission. Wh en yo u in st al l a pr in te r dr iv er, log on using a n account that has Administrator permissio n.
Prepari ng to Print 32 2 H H H H Close the D esktop Printer Utility. Inst alling the Pr inter Driver Using IEEE 1394 Printing using a SCS I print device with the opt ional IEEE 1394 inter face boar d is pos sible un der Window s 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003.
Insta lling the Sof tware 33 2 E E E E Hold down the left { { { { SHI FT } } } } key and insert t he CD-R OM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the l eft { { { { SHIFT } } } } key hel d down until the compu ter has fin- ished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, clic k [ Cancel ] , an d then clic k [ Exit ] .
Prepari ng to Print 34 2 • Window s Me A In the [ Add New Hardware Wiz - ard ] dialog box, confirm that [ Windows has fou nd the follow - ing new Hardware: IEEE SBP-2 Device ] is d isplay ed, a nd cl ick [ Reco mme nded search for a bet- ter dr iver [Recommended] ] , and then click [ Next ] .
Insta lling the Sof tware 35 2 D When “ Driver File s Search Res ult s ” appears, clic k [ Disa- ble th e devi ce. T he Add /Rem ove Hardwar e Wizard in the Control Pa nel c an be use d to c omp lete the driver installations. ] , and then click [ Finis h ] .
Prepari ng to Print 36 2 C C C C Select a language for the interface language , and then click [ OK ] . The follow ing languages ar e avail- able: Cestina ( Czech), Dansk (Dan- ish), Deutsch (Ge rman).
Soft ware and Utili ties Inclu ded on the CD-ROM 37 2 Software and Uti lities Include d on the CD- ROM There are two C D-ROMs t hat co me with thi s machine .
Prepari ng to Print 38 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ PCL print er drivers Two k inds of PCL p rinter d river s: PCL 6 and PCL 5e, are included on the C D-ROM th at com es w ith thi s machi ne. Th ese drivers allow the computer to communic ate with the machin e via a printer lan- guage.
Soft ware and Utili ties Inclu ded on the CD-ROM 39 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ USB Pri nting S upport This utility is fo r the USB 2.0 in ter- face. Instal l this to use U SB on compu ters r unnin g Windo ws 98 SE/Me. For in formation about in- stalla tion, see p.
40 INDEX 1394 U tility , 38 A Acroba t Reader , 39 ATM Macintosh, installing , 28 B Bidi rectional t ransmission , 25 Bypass tray , 8 C CD-ROM , 37 Connection Eth ern et bo ard conn ect ion , 6 IEEE 1.
41 S Screen fonts Macintosh, installing , 29 SCSI p rint , 32 Sma rtDev ic eMoni tor f or Ad min , 35 , 38 Sma rtDev iceMo nit or fo r Cli ent , 35 , 38 Softw are Quick Install , 14 T Thick P ape r pr.
42 MEMO Stel laC2-G B-Pre f1-F3_FM _ZF.bo ok Page 42 Fr iday, November 21, 2 003 8: 42 PM.
43 MEMO Stel laC2-G B-Pre f1-F3_FM _ZF.bo ok Page 43 Fr iday, November 21, 2 003 8: 42 PM.
44 GB GB B 683-8617 MEMO Stel laC2-G B-Pre f1-F3_FM _ZF.bo ok Page 44 Fr iday, November 21, 2 003 8: 42 PM.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Decl aration o f Confor.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Operat ing Instruc tion.
Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it.
Introduction This manu al describes detailed i nstruction s on the oper ation and notes about the use of this machin e. To ge t maximum versatili ty from thi s mach ine all operators a re reques ted to re ad this m anual c arefully and fo llow the in struction s.
i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular functions, s ee the relevant pa rts of the manual . Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Sc anner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, an d the operatin g environment for De skTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ......... ......... ......... ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...
iv.
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the followin g symbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situatio n which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
2 Major Components a nd Software Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual: • IEEE 1394 In terface Board Type B → I EEE 1394 interface board • IEEE 802.
3 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Accessing Printer Properties Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing Pri nter Properties Changing default se ttings A A A A On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Set- tings ] , and then click [ Pr inter s ] .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 4 1 Windows 2000 /XP and Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Pri nter Properties Changing de fault settings - Printer properties Limi tation ❒ Cha nging m achi ne sett ings re quir es Manage Prin ters per mission.
Accessing Printer Properties 5 1 D D D D Make the settings you require, and then click [ OK ] . Note ❒ Setting s you make here are use d as default for all app lications. Making se ttings from a n application To make settings for a specific appli- cation, o pen the [ Pri nt ] dialog box from that ap plic ation .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 6 1 Changing the def ault settings - Default document propertie s Limi tation ❒ Cha nging m achi ne sett ings re quir es Full Control access permission.
Accessing Printer Properties 7 1 Macintosh - Sett ing Up for Printi ng Making pape r settings from a n application A A A A Open the file you want to print. B B B B On the [ File ] menu, click [ Pag e Set- up ] . The [ AdobePS Pa ge Setup ] dialog box appears.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 8 1 Canceling a Print Job Windows - Can celing a Print Job A A A A Double-click the printer ico n on the Windows taskbar. A window appears, showing all print jobs cu rrently queued for printing. Check the curre nt status of th e job you wan t to cance l.
Canceling a Print Job 9 1 Macintosh - Canceli ng a Print Job Mac OS A A A A Double-click the printer ico n on the desktop. A window appears, showing all print jobs cu rrently queued for printing. Check the curre nt status of th e job you wan t to cance l.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 10 1 G G G G Press [ Curre nt ] . • [ Current ] : cancels the print job currently being process ed. • [ Resume ] : resumes printing jobs. A confirmation message appears. H H H H Press [ Yes ] to cancel the print job.
11 2. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Display This se ction descr ibes the princi pal mess ages that app ear on the displ ay. If a message not described here a ppears, act accordi ng to the message. Reference Before turning the main power off, see ‘ Tur ning On th e Po wer ’ , Copy Refer- ence .
Troubleshooting 12 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Alert me ssages Messages/Second messages Causes Solutions Add ton er Out of toner. Follow instructions inside and replace toner.
Error & Status Messages on the Display 13 2 Ethernet Board Err or An error has occu rred in the Ethernet interface. Turn off the ma in power switc h, and b ack on agai n. I f the m essag e app ears ag ain , contac t your sales or servi ce representative.
Troubleshooting 14 2 Paper Tray is in use. The specified paper tray is in use by another function, such as the copier function. Wait until the othe r function has finished using the speci- fied pap er tray. D Toner is almos t empty Add ton er The toner has almost run out.
The Machine Does Not Print 15 2 The Machine Do es Not Print Possibl e Cause Solutions Is the power on? Check the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet and the machine. Turn on the main power switch. Is the machine online? If not, press { { { { f f f f Online } } } } on the control panel.
Troubleshooting 16 2 When using wireless LAN, is the LED on the wireless LAN card lit or blinking? Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the green LED is lit or blinks during transm ission. Is the wireless LAN being used in ad hoc mode? Turn the main p ower off and back on.
The Machine Does Not Print 17 2 Problem Sol utions Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the p ri nt jo b? If not, data is not being sent to the machine. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machin e is connected to the comput er using the interf ace cable Check the machine port settings are correct.
Troubleshooting 18 2 Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the p ri nt jo b? ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Network connection Contact your network ad ministrator.
Other Printing Problems 19 2 Other Printing Problems Proble m Causes and S olutions The print on the entire pa ge is fad- ed. If [ T oner Savin g ] is selected on the [ Print Quality ] tab in the printer driver, the entire page will be faded when printed.
Troubleshooting 20 2 When using Win- dows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/ XP, or Win - dows NT 4.0, ei- ther combined printing or book- let print does not come out as ex - pecte d. Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match thos e of the printer driver.
Other Printing Problems 21 2 It tak es a l ong time to com pl ete a print jo b. Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long time for the ma- chine to process, so simply wait when printing such data.
Troubleshooting 22 2 Note ❒ If the problem cannot be solved, contac t your sales or service re presentative. It takes too much time to res ume printin g. The d ata is s o lar ge or c omp lex tha t it tak es ti me to p roce ss. If t he Data In indicator is blinking, data is b eing processed.
23 3. Printer Features Reference For more information about copier features and system settings, s ee Copy Ref- erence and Gener al Settings Guide . Printer Features Menu There are seven menu i tems i.
Printer Features 24 3 System See p.31 “ Sys tem ” . Print Error Report Auto C onti nue Memory Overflow Memory Usa ge Duplex Copies Edge Smoothing Toner Saving Pri nter L angu ag e Sub P aper Size Page Siz e Letterhe ad Setting Edge-Edge Print Default Printer L ang.
Adjusting Printer Features 25 3 Adjusting Printer Features Printer Features allows basic adjustment of operations when using the machine as a printe r. Althou gh factory default settings are suitable for most printing jobs, Printer Fea- tures gives you acc ess to a number of settings that control basic printer opera- tions.
Printer Features 26 3 Printer Features Parameters Paper In put ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bypass Pape r Size The size of the paper set in the by- pass tray. Reference For more information about pa- per siz es that can be set in the bypass tray, see General Settings Gui de .
Printer Features P arameters 27 3 Interpreting the c onfiguration page System R eferenc e ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Un it N um ber Displays the serial n um ber ass igned to the board by its manufacture r. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Total Memory Displays the total amount of memory (SDRA M) installed on the printer.
Printer Features 28 3 PCL Menu Displays the settings made und er PCL Menu. Reference p.33 “ PCL Menu ” PS Menu Displays the settings made und er PS Menu. Reference p.35 “ PS Menu ” Host Int erface Displays the settings made under the Host Interface menu.
Printer Features P arameters 29 3 Maintenanc e ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Menu Protect Thi s proced ure le ts you pr otect menu set tings from acci dental change . It makes it impossible to change menu settings wit h normal procedures un less you perform the required key operations.
Printer Features 30 3 Canceling Menu Prote ct A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Printer Features ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Printer Features P arameters 31 3 System ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print Error Report Select this to have an er ror report printed when a printer or memory error occurs. • On • Off Note ❒ De faul t: Off ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Continue You can select this to enab le Auto Con tinue.
Printer Features 32 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer Language Normally, the machine should be set to Au to. If the printer language cannot be detected in Auto, the langu age specifie d by Default Printer Lang.
Printer Features P arameters 33 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Edge-Edge Print Select this to maximize the printa- ble area by minim izing the white space along the edges, to approxi- mately 0.04 inches (1 mm). • Off • On Note ❒ De faul t: Off ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Default P rinter Lang.
Printer Features 34 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Font Number You can set the ID of the def au lt font you w ant to use. • 0 to 50 by 1 Note ❒ De faul t: 0 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Point Size You can set th e point s ize you want to use for the selected font. • 4.00 to 999.
Printer Features P arameters 35 3 PS Menu ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Data Format You can sele ct a data format . • Binar y • TBCP Limitatio n ❒ This s etting is not e ffectiv e when operating the machine with a paral lel, USB, or EtherTalk con- nect ion.
Printer Features 36 3.
37 4. Appendix Collate If you sele ct the collate function on t he printer driver, the machine will stor e print data in m emory and automatically collate the prin touts. The collate function can be turned on or off from th e printer driver. Limi tation ❒ You ca nnot use th e bypass tray with th is function.
Appendix 38 4 User Defined Pages Using this function , you can specify the page numbers for each input tray. Reference For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
System Settings (Parallel Connection) 39 4 System Settings (Parallel Connection) Interface Settings/Paral lel Interface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Parallel Tim ing Specifies the timing for the para llel interface. Norma lly, you do not need to ch ange this setting .
Appendix 40 4 Specifications This se ction co ntains t he machin e's ele ctrical and hardwar e specifi cations, in- cluding information about its options.
Specifications 41 4 Options Limi tation ❒ Only one optional interface can be ins talled in the machine at a time. There- fore, the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, the optional IEEE 802.
Appendix 42 4 IEEE 8 02.11b Interface U nit Type D ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Transm ission spe c.: Based on IE EE 802.11b (wireless LAN) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol: TCP/ IP, NetBEU I, IPX/SP X, Apple Talk Note ❒ SmartDeviceMonitor an d Web browser are supported .
43 INDEX B BlueTooth Unit Type 2238 , 42 C Can celing a j ob Macin tosh , 9 Wind ows , 8 Config uration page , 26 Cont rol pane l Printer Features, adjus ting , 23 D Data In indicato r , 17 , 21 , 22 .
44 GB GB B683-86 30.
Copyri ght © 2003.
Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 GB GB B6 83-863 0.
Operating I nstructions Scanner Reference For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it.
Introduction This manu al describes detailed i nstruction s on the oper ation and notes about the use of this machin e. To ge t maximum versatili ty from thi s mach ine all operators a re reques ted to re ad this m anual c arefully and fo llow the in struction s.
i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular functions, s ee the relevant pa rts of the manual . Note ❒ The manuals provided are s pecific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM labeled "Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities".
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ......... ......... ......... ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...
iv 5. Using the Network Delivery Sca nner Function Preparation for Delivering ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...... 47 Network Delive ry Sca nner S creen ...... ...... ...... ......... ....... .....
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the followin g symbols are used: Important If this instruc tion is not followed, paper might be misfed, or iginals might be damaged, or files might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations requ ired before op- erating.
2.
3 1. Network Scanner Outline The machine c an be used as a net work scanner. As a network scanner, the machi ne can send scan files by e-mail, operate as a net- work delivery sca nner, and operate as a network TWAIN scanner. E-mail Scan files that are attached to a n e-mail can be se nt using the e-mail system through a LA N or the Internet.
Network Scanner 4 1 Network Delivery Scanner The machine is used as a delivery scanner with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profession- al. Scan files are stored in the delivery server and d elivered to the f olders of cli- ent computers on the same network. Reference p.
Outline 5 1 Network T WAIN Scanner The s canning funct ion of t his machine can be u sed from a client c omputer via a network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (I P over 1394) [optional], or IEEE 802.11b (Wire- less LAN) [optional]). Reference p.61 “ Using the Netw ork TWAIN S canner F unction ” 1.
Network Scanner 6 1 Control Panel This illustration sh ows the control panel when options are ins talled. 1. { { { { Sear ch D est ina tion } } } } key Press to search for th e destination from the Destination L ist. 2. { { { { Check Des tination } } } } key Press to check the d estinations curre ntly selected.
Control Panel 7 1 14. Qui ck Dial key s Press to select the registered destination wi th a sing le to uch , or to e nter lette rs and symbols. Reference For mo re i nforma tion, see General Settings Guide . Note ❒ You can reg ister up to 16 dest inations using the Quick Dial keys.
Network Scanner 8 1.
9 2. Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner To use the ma chine as a network scanner, y ou must make setti ngs required for use as a scan ner as well as basic s ettings for use in a network. Reference Fir st, se e Genera l Settings Guid e for details about how to m ake basic settings , and then m ake scanner settings.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 10 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Send Settings For explanations of settings, s ee p.14 “ Send Settings ” . Setting procedure A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key.
Initial Scanner Setup 11 2 D D D D Select a setting using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Example: TWAIN Standby Time setting E E E E Change the settings. • Se lec t a n it em usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 12 2 Scan Se ttings This section explains how to set the defaults for scan settin gs. The scan settings consist of the fol- lowing. F or the list about s ettings and defaults, see p .9 “ Scanner Features ” .
Initial Scanner Setup 13 2 Selecti ng a cust om size When sele cti ng [ Custom Size ] as the scan size, fo llow the proc edu re be- low. A A A A Select [ Custom S ize ] on the Sca n Size screen using the scroll keys, and th en pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 14 2 Send Se ttings This section explains how to set the default s for sending settings and how the machine switches to the network TW AIN sca nner f unction . The send settings consist of the fol- lowing. F or the list about s ettings and defaults, see p .
Initial Scanner Setup 15 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Divide & Send E-mail This function is ef fective only whe n [ On ] is sele cted f or [ Max. E- mail Size ] . When an e-mail with an attached file exceeds the size specifi ed in [ Max. E- mail Size ] , select whether or not to divid e the file and send us- ing more than one e-mail.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 16 2 Installing Software The m ach ine comes w ith th ree C D-RO Ms contai ning variou s so ftw are. The CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities ” con- tains the necessary softw are to use the m achine as a network scanne r.
Installing Software 17 2 The install ing sequence using Auto Run is a s follows. For information about the software that can be installed by Auto Run, see p.20 “ Software Supplied o n CD-ROM ” . Installation Sequence The installer starts up. The installation complete message is displayed.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 18 2 Software f or Using a Network TWAIN Scanner To use the m achine a s a net work TWAIN scanner, it is essential to in stall t he TWAIN d river. I f y o u d o n o t h a v e a p p l i c a t i o n s t h a t w o r k w i t h T W A I N , i t i s n e c e s s a r y t o a l s o install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
Installing Software 19 2 Software f or Using the Network Del ivery Scanner Fun ction To use the machine as a network delivery sc anner, it is essential to instal l Scan- Router V2 Lite on the delivery server. To check an in-tray or retrieve files, it is necessary to install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on the client computer.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 20 2 Reference For information about the subsequent installation procedure, see Setup Guide th at can be d ispla yed fro m the S etup scr een of DeskTo pBind er V2 Li te. Software Supp lied on CD-ROM List of file s TWAIN Driver This driver is requ ired to scan an original on the machine.
Installing Software 21 2 • Memor y Operatin g system minimum operat ion memory + 8 MB (64 MB or more recomm ende d) • Hard dis k space 100 MB or more • Displ ay resolution 800 × 600 pi xels, 25.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 22 2 • Hard dis k space 50 MB or more (200 MB or more recommended) • Displ ay resolution 800 × 600 pi xels, 64K colours or higher • Network p rotocol T.
Installing Software 23 2 • Hardware PC/AT compatible • CPU Pentium 200 MHz or faster (Penti um II 350 MHz or faster recommended) • Ope ratin g system Micr osoft Window s 95 (OS R 2 or l ater ) M.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 24 2.
25 3. Setting Originals This chapter ex plains the procedure for pl acing originals on the exposur e glass and in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF), and settin g the original scan area and orientation accordin g to the placem ent method.
Setting Originals 26 3 Placing on t he Exposure Glass Originals which do not fit into the ADF, su ch as sh eets wi th glued-on parts, books, etc., can be plac ed di- rectly on the exposure glass for scan- ning. Note ❒ For information about the origi- nals which can be place d on the ex - posure gl ass, see Copy Refe rence .
Placing Originals 27 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When plac ing the original so that the t op edge touche s the t op left of the exposure glass Wh en us ing the m achin e as a networ k TWAIN scan ner, th is orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN d river.
Setting Originals 28 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When placing the top edges of the originals firs t Wh en us ing the m achin e as a networ k TWAIN scan ner, th is orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN d river. Nor- mally , use this or ienta tion fo r placing originals.
Original Orientation 29 3 Original Orientation To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of a scanned original on a client computer, original orient ation must be set when placing th e original. When using the e-mail fu nction or the network deli very scanner function, setting s are made on the cont rol panel of the machine .
Setting Originals 30 3 Scanning Originals in Several Times using the Exposure Glass A A A A Place the originals . Reference p.25 “ Pla cin g O ri g ina ls ” Note ❒ O rig ina ls ar e s ca nn ed in or de r. Place them from the first page. B B B B Make setti ngs for sca nning area and original orien tation.
31 4. Sending Scan Files by E- mail Scan files ca n be sent from thi s machine to a specified destination us ing e-mail. This chapter explains the preparation for sending scan files by e-mail, various display screens, procedures for se nding, and how to che ck the sending r esult when this function is us ed.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 32 4 E-ma il Scree n These screen s are shown when u sing the machine for e-mai l . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main disp lay ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d estinatio n is sele cted 1. E-mail icon ( ) Indicates that the E-mail scree n is dis- played.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 33 4 Sending Scan Files by E-mail Procedu re for Sending by E- mail Scan fil es are se nt after specifying scan settin gs and destinations. A A A A Press the { { { { Scanner } } } } key. B B B B If the user codes are set, enter a user code u sing the numbe r keys , and th en pr ess the { { { { # } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 34 4 Using a Quick Dial key to select a destinat ion A Press the Quick Dial k ey in which the d estination is regis- tered. Reference For more information about how to register the destina- tion, see General Settings Guide .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 35 4 D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 36 4 C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been assigne d to a destination using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E To select more destinations, re- peat steps A A A A to D D D D .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 37 4 Manual entry of an e-mail address A Press [ Manual ] . B Enter the e-mail address. Note ❒ It is possible to u se letters, numbers, and periods. The symbols ( ),;: ” ca nnot be used . Reference For informat ion about how to enter characters, see Gen er- al Settings Guide .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 38 4 H H H H Specify the e-mail send er. To speci fy a se nder, you can select it using the Quick Dial key, search for an d select it from the Destin a- tion List, o r select it by spe cifying a registration number. A Press [ Options ] .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 39 4 C For receiving a return receipt confirmation , select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then the S end Op- tions screen returns .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 40 4 Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s. Enter the sender's password using the n umber k eys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 41 4 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then th e Return Re- ceipt screen re turns. E For receiving a return receipt confirmation , select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 42 4 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then th e Return Re- ceipt screen re turns. E For receiving a return receipt confor mation, select [ On ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 43 4 D Select the sender using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 44 4 Man ual en try of a subj ect A Select [ Manual Input ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter a subj ect, and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Checking the Status of E-mail 45 4 Checking the S tatus of E-mail The status of the l ast 50 sendings can be checked. For every new sending record after 50, the oldest record is dele ted. Important ❒ When the main power switch is turned off, all records are deleted.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 46 4.
47 5. Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function Scan files can be se nt to a specified destination using the network delivery scan- ner function. This chapter explains the p reparation sequence, vari ous display scre ens, deli ver y proced ures, and how to check t he deliv ery resu lt when this function is u sed.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 48 5 Network Deliver y Scanner Screen These scre ens are shown when using the machine as a network delivery scan ner. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main disp lay ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d estinatio n is sele cted 1. Network Deliv ery Scanner icon () Indicates that the Network Delivery Scann er screen i s displ ayed.
Preparation for Delivering 49 5 Note ❒ Press the { { { { Check Dest ination } } } } key t o check the select ed destinatio n. ❒ Gro up d esti natio ns are d eno ted by this symbol ( ). 3. [] E-mail/Network Delivery Scann er Press to switch betwee n the net work delivery scanner function and the e- mai l fu nct ion .
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 50 5 Delivering Scan Files Delivery Procedure Scan files are delivered after sc an set- tings and destinations are specified. If necess ary, you can select a sender and a subject. A A A A Press the { { { { Scanner } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 51 5 Note ❒ When using Sc anRouter V2 Lite/Professional, the Destina- tion List is updated automati- cally. Using a Quick Dial key to select a destinat ion A Press the Quick Dial k ey in which the d estination is regis- tered.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 52 5 Reference For informat ion about how to enter characters, see Gen er- al Settings Guide . D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 53 5 B Select [ Searc h by Registration No . ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been assigne d to a destination using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 54 5 D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 55 5 G G G G Specify the sender (scan file de- liver source) if necessary. To speci fy a send er, you can s earch for an d select it from the Destin a- tion List, o r select it by spe cifying a registration number. A Press [ Options ] .
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 56 5 Searching to select a send er by name A Press t he { { { { Sea rch De stin ati on } } } } key. B Select [ Search by Name ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 57 5 When sel ecting a se nder from Destination L ist A Press t he { { { { Sea rch De stin ati on } } } } key. B Select [ D ispl ay De stina tion List ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 58 5 B Select [ Searc h by Registration No . ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been assigne d to a sender using the number keys , and the n press th e { { { { OK } } } } key twice.
Delivering Scan Files 59 5 Man ual en try of a subj ect A Select [ Manual Input ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter a subj ect, and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then the S end Op- tions screen returns .
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 60 5 Checking the S tatus of Deliver y The status of the last 50 deliveries can be ch ecked. For ever y new deli very record after 50, the oldest record is dele ted. Important ❒ When the main power switch is turned off, all records are deleted.
61 6. Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function This chapter describes the operations for scanning originals with the network TWAIN scanner using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. In addition, the preparation for using the network TW AIN scanner and s ome functi ons of the T WAIN driver are introduced.
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 62 6 Scanning Originals This section explains how t o scan originals usi ng the network TWAIN scanner function .
Scanning Originals 63 6 Note ❒ For advanced settings, click [ Detail ] to displa y the Detail window. F or info rmation about the Detail window, see TWAIN drive r Help. C According to the settings of [ Document ] and [ Orientation: ] , change the other setting of the [ Document ] group.
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 64 6 Functions of the TWAI N Driver The following is an introduction to the various functions of the TWAIN dri ver: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Automatic Tilt Correction This function automatically cor- rects charac ter strings that were scanned sla nted.
65 7. Appendix Relationship between Resolution and File Size Resolution and scan area are inversely re lated. The higher the resolution is set, the smaller the area that can be scanned. Converse ly, the larger the scan area, the lower the resolution that can be set.
Appendix 66 7 Max. Number of Addres ses Which Can Be Specified *1 Up to 50 add resses can be entered di rectly. All remaini ng addresses have to b e spec- ified using the registered ones. *2 The maximum number of addresses which can b e specified varies de pending on the software you use, Sca nRouter V2 Lite or ScanRouter V2 Professi onal.
Troubleshooting 67 7 Troubleshooting This section contains advice on wha t to do if you have probl ems scanning an origina l, or if the net work deli very scanner or e- mail functio n does no t work. Various messages that may appear on the control panel or cli ent computer are listed, along with causes and so lutions.
Appendix 68 7 When an Error Messag e Appears on the Contro l Panel Note ❒ If an error message that is not included in this section appears, turn off the main power switch of the mac hine, and then turn it on again.
Troubleshooting 69 7 Exce eded ma x.me mory capa. Sca nnin g wil l be cancel led. Sc anned da ta will be c leared. Because of insufficient memory space, th e first page could not be scanned. Try one of the following measures: • Wait for a while, and then retry the scan opera tion.
Appendix 70 7 When an Error Messag e Appears on the Client Computer This sect ion describes the main possible cause s and actions for error messages displayed on the client c omputer when the TWAIN driver is us ed.
Troubleshooting 71 7 [ Error has occurred in the scanner driver. ] • Che ck whet her the ne twork ca ble is con- nec ted correct ly to the client com puter. • Check whether the Et hernet board of the client computer is recognized cor- rectly by Windows .
Appendix 72 7 Specifications *1 Scanning speed s vary accord ing to machi ne operating co nditions, computer (sp eci- fication, netwo rk traffic, an d software, etc.), and orig inal types. Scan method Flatbed scanning Scan sp eed *1 • E-mail/Network Delivery Scanner Appro x.
73 INDEX A Auto Documen t Link , 22 Automatic T ilt Correction , 64 Auto Run prog ram , 16 C Checking th e status of de livery , 60 Checking th e status of e- mail , 45 Comp ress ion , 14 Cont rol pan.
74 GB GB B683-87 10 P Plac ing or iginals , 25 Auto Document Feed er (ADF) , 27 exposu re glass , 26 Preparatio n for delivering , 47 Prepa rati on for send ing by e -mail , 31 Prev iew , 63 Print &Del.
In accord ance with IEC 60417, th is mach ine uses the followi ng symbols for the m ain power s witch: a a a a means POW ER ON. c c c c means STAND BY.
Operating Instructions Scanner Reference GB GB B6 83-871 0.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
i Manuals f or This Machine The follow ing manuals descr ibe the operatio nal procedures of thi s machine. For particular functions, see the r e levant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are sp ecific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBi nder V2 Lite Des kT opB inde r V 2 L ite is a ut ilit y i ncl uded on t he CD -RO M l abe led “ Scanner Dr iver & Do cume nt M ana ge men t U til itie s ” .
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manua ls for This Mach ine .... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... .... i How to Rea d This Manua l . ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... .....
iv Searc hing for a Desti nation ... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ........ ... 32 Search by Dest ination Name ........ ....... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... . 32 Selecting fr om Destination Lis t .
1 How to Read This Manual Sym bol s In th is manu al, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machin e without following t he in- struc tions unde r this symb ol.
2 Stel laC2-G Bcomb ine-F_FM_ ZF.bo ok Page 2 Wedn esday, Novem ber 26, 2003 5: 04 PM.
3 1. Getting Started Control Panel The illustr ation show s the control pan el when option s are i nst alled. 1. Communicating indicator Lights during tran smission or reception. 2. Receive File indicator Lights t o tell you a message h as been re- ce ive d int o m em ory .
Getti ng Started 4 1 12. { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key Use to chang e defaul t or operatio n pa- ramet ers according to the operating con- di tion s. 13. { { { { Clear Mo des } } } } key Press to clear the cu rrent setting. 14. { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key Clear: Clears an entered numeric value.
Cont rol Panel 5 1 Reading t he Disp lay The display shows yo u the machine status, messages, and guides you through oper atio ns. Note ❒ This mach ine a utom aticall y retur ns to stand by m ode i f you do not use th e machine for a certain period of ti me.
Getti ng Started 6 1 1. Machi ne status or current ly se- lected function 2. Messa ge 3. Destinati on entry 4. Selection keys 5. Selectab le items ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When Internet Fax Settings is ON 1. Switches the destination be- tween fax number an d e-mail ad- dres s.
Cont rol Panel 7 1 Co mmu nic atio n dis play While comm unicating, t he machi ne status is displaye d. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory Transmission (fax transmiss ion) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reception ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Immediate Transmissio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ TX Mo de When a function is set to on, a “ clip ” m ark is at tached to th at f unction name .
Getti ng Started 8 1 User code entry disp lay When the following message a ppears on the d isplay, User Code Management is acti ve. E nter a u ser c ode to deac tivate Us er Code Ma nagem ent. The machine can be set up so that no one can use it withou t enterin g a user co de.
9 2. Faxing Transm ission Modes There are two types of transmission: • Memory Transmission • Immediate T ransmissi o n Note ❒ You can use Paralle l Memory T r a n s- mission that dials while the origi- nal is bein g scanned. See p.28 “ Para llel M em ory Tr ansmi ssi on ” , Facsimile Ref erence <Adv anced Fea- tures> .
Faxing 10 2 Import ant ❒ If power outage lasts abo ut an hour, o r the machin e is discon- nected from the p ower outlet for ab out an hou r, documen ts stored in t he fax machi ne's memory are d eleted. If any doc - ument is deleted, the Po wer Failure R eport is automa tically print ed out when th e main powe r sw it ch is t urn ed o n.
Placin g Originals 11 2 Placing Or iginals You can set your originals either in the Do cument F eeder o r on the expo- sure glass. Some types of originals are unsuitable for the Document Feeder so they mu st be set on the exposure glass.
Faxing 12 2 ❒ Make sure that all ink, correcting flui d etc., has com plete ly dri ed be- fore placing your ori ginal. If it is stil l wet, the exposure glass will be marked an d those marks w ill ap- pear on the receiv ed im age. ❒ You can send the first pages from the exposur e glass then the re- maini ng page s fro m t he ADF.
Placin g Originals 13 2 ❒ You can chec k in for mati on abou t the sizes and number of originals t h a t c a n b e p l a c e d i n t h e A D F . S ee p.102 “ Acceptable T ypes of Origi- nals ” , Facsimile Reference <Ad- vanced F eatures> .
Faxing 14 2 Memor y Transmis sion In Memory Transmission mode, after you press the { { { { Star t } } } } key, the machine do es not dial th e d estin at ion unti l all pages of your fax message have .
Memory Tr ansmission 15 2 B B B B Place the original in the ADF, or on the exposure glass. Note ❒ You can send the first few p ages from the exposure glass then the remaining pages from the ADF. After you r emove the l ast page from the exposure gl ass, you have 60 seconds to inser t the rema ining pages in the ADF.
Faxing 16 2 ❒ Entered destinations can b e checked using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . ❒ To del ete an ente red desti na- tion, find it using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , press the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key, and then p ress [ Delete ] .
Cancelin g a Memo ry Trans mission 17 2 Cancel ing a Memory Transmi ssion Eve n when fa x num ber and e-m ail address are simultaneousl y speci fied, or only e-m ail add re ss is spe cif ied, you ca n cance l the mod e using th e s a m e p r o c e d u r e .
Faxing 18 2 A A A A Make sure t hat the stand by dis- play a ppears. Note ❒ If you press the { { { { Clear /Stop } } } } ke y whil e the origina l is being scanne d, scanning st ops. B B B B Pre ss t he { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key. C C C C Pre ss [ S top TX ] .
Immediate Transmissi on 19 2 Immediate Trans mission With Imme diate Transmission, when you pr ess the { { { { Start } } } } key, th e fax number is dialed imm ediately. The message is scanned and transmitte d page by page wit hout being stored in memo ry.
Faxing 20 2 Refere nce p.1 1 “ Placing Origin als ” . C C C C Sele ct the sc an set tings yo u re- qui re. Refere nce p.2 3 “ Sc an Se ttings ” p.2 4 “ Original Type ” p.25 “ Image Densi ty (Con - trast ) ” D D D D Specify a des tination.
Immediate Transmissi on 21 2 - - - - Sendi ng o rigin als usi ng t he expos ure gla ss A Mak e su re the Mem ory Tr ans . in- dicato r is off. If it i s not, pre ss the { { { { Memory Trans. } } } } key. B Place the first page face dow n on the exposu re glass.
Faxing 22 2 Cancel ing an Immediat e Transmis sion Befor e You Hav e Press ed { { { { Start } } } } Key A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Clear Mo des } } } } key. Note ❒ When the original is placed in the ADF, you can also cancel an Immediate T ransmission by re- moving the original.
Scan Set tings 23 2 Scan Settings You m ay want to send many di fferent types of fax messages. Some of these ma y be diff icul t to rep rod uce at the receiver 's end. However, your ma- ch ine has thre e settin gs that yo u can adjust to help you tr ansmit your doc- ument with the best po ssible image qualit y.
Faxing 24 2 A A A A Press the { { { { Re sol uti on } } } } key to switch between resolutions. The indica - tors above the key shows the cur- rent s elect ion.
Scan Set tings 25 2 Image Densi ty (Contrast ) Th e text an d di agra ms in you r o rig i- nal s hould stand ou t clear ly from the paper the y are writte n on. I f your original has a darker background than normal (f or example, a newspa- per cli pping ), or i f the writing is fa int, adjust the image density.
Faxing 26 2 When placi ng original s in the ADF Note ❒ Depending o n what time the scan settings are adjusted, the settings may no t be refl ected in the re sult - ing operati on. A A A A Chec k whic h pages you wan t to scan with different sett ings.
Specifyi ng a Des tinati on 27 2 Speci fying a Dest ination Yo u can spec ify the de stin ati on using one of three method s. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax number p.27 “ Enter ing a Fax Number ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ E-mail address p.29 “ Entering an E-m ail Address ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Destination list p.
Faxing 28 2 Pau se Press the { { { { Pause/Re dial } } } } key w hen di- aling or storing a number to insert a pau se of about tw o s econds. Note ❒ You cannot insert a p ause bef ore the first digit of a fax number. If you pr ess th e { { { { Pause/ Redi al } } } } key at the first digit, a redial occurs.
Specifyi ng a Des tinati on 29 2 Enter ing an E- mail Address Wh en using Intern et Fax transm is- sion, specify th e e-mail address in place o f the fax number . Note ❒ You can enter up to 128 c haracters. A A A A Make sure that is displayed in the destin ation display colum n .
Faxing 30 2 Limitati on ❒ Group Dial can be used for Memory Transmi ssion only; not Im mediate Transmissi on. If you specify Imme- diate Transmission in Group Dial, the " Try again after switching to me mory tr ansm ission. " mes- sage appears.
Specifyi ng a Des tinati on 31 2 Note ❒ If you make a mistake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and try again. ❒ If you w ant to speci fy other d es- tinations, p ress [ Add Dest ] .
Faxing 32 2 Searc hing for a Desti nation Use t his procedur e to search thro ugh the dest ination lists for a p articular destin ation. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Search by Destination Name p.32 “ Se arch b y Destin atio n Name ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Select by Display Destination List p.
Searching f or a Destinati on 33 2 F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. A search progress starts, then search r esult app ears. Note ❒ If no destination is m atched for specified text, " Sp ecified des- tination i s not p rogrammed. " is displa yed.
Faxing 34 2 F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The sp ecified d estinat ion is se lect- ed. Note ❒ Press [ Add Dest ] to specify other destina tions. ❒ You cann ot sp ecif y des ti nati ons twice. If you try to, t he “ This desti nation has alread y been progr ammed.
Searching f or a Destinati on 35 2 Searc h by Fa x Number Note ❒ The search returns only destina- tions who se beginnings matc h the entered fax n umber. A A A A Pre ss [] to display . B B B B Pre ss t he { { { { Search Destin ation } } } } key. C C C C Sel ect [ Search b y Fax N o.
Faxing 36 2 H H H H Select the number to specify u s- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The destination which yo u searched is specif ied. Note ❒ Press [ Add Dest ] to specify other destina tions.
Searching f or a Destinati on 37 2 G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Search resul t appears. Note ❒ If no dest ination is m atched for speci fied e-mail ad dress, " Sp ec- ified destina tion is not p ro- gram med. " is disp layed.
Faxing 38 2 Rece ption There ar e two ways you can s et up your mach ine to handle i ncoming calls: • Manual Reception (ext ernal tele- phon e required) • Aut o Rec eptio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Switch In this mode, the machine r ings a number of times.
Recept ion 39 2 B B B B Select the rec eption mode using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d t hen p ress t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The standby display appears. Note ❒ To cancel the sel ection, p ress the { { { { Can cel } } } } key.
Faxing 40 2 Stel laC2-G Bcomb ine-F_FM _ZF.bo ok Page 40 Wed nesday , Nove mber 26 , 2003 5 :04 PM.
41 3. Using Internet Fax Functions Internet Fax Functions The optional printer /scanner unit is required. Thi s machi ne co nvert s scann ed do cumen t imag es to e- mail f ormat a nd tran smi ts the d ata over t he Inter net. The e-mail sent by this machine can b e received by a nother Internet F ax ma- chine.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 42 3 Interne t Fax Precaut ions • Internet F ax co mmunicat es with a serv er over a LAN. It c annot co mmun icate dire ctly w ith ot her pa rties. • If a transmission is not suc cessful, this machine usually r eceives an e-mail er- ror noti ficatio n.
Inter net Fax Funct ions 43 3 T.37 Full Mode This machine is T.37 full m ode compatible. T.37 full mode is an international standard for Internet Fax transmission. (ITU-T announcement, RFC2532) When an I ntern et Fax c ommunica tio n is made betwee n T.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 44 3 Note ❒ If the receiver is programmed as the simp le mode machin e or not pro- grammed in the A ddress Bo ok, the r eceiv er's rec eption capabili ty can not be registered. ❒ If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually .
Tra nsmi tti ng Inte rne t Fax 45 3 Transmitting Internet Fax Prep arat io n You need to make System Settings beforeh and. Se e “ Setting Up the Mac hine on a Netw ork ” , Ne two rk Guide . This sect ion de scri bes ho w to sc an a doc ument into the memo ry and send it as e-mail.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 46 3 ❒ You ca n limit the size of tran smit- ted e-mail messages. See p.68 “ E- mail Set tings ” , Fac simile Referen ce <Advanced Fea tures> . ❒ See p.54 “ Received Im ages ” for ho w e-m a il is act ual ly r ec eiv ed by the com pute r when i t is sent with mail options selec ted.
Tra nsmi tti ng Inte rne t Fax 47 3 D Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The d isplay re turns to that of step A . Note ❒ If you p ress the { { { { Cancel } } } } key, entering a subject is canceled.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 48 3 ❒ The or iginal ca n be placed ei- ther in the A DF or on the expo- sure glass, unti l the { { { { Start } } } } key is pressed. Refere nce p.1 1 “ Placing Origin als ” . F F F F Sele ct t he sca n se tting s you requ ire.
Tra nsmi tti ng Inte rne t Fax 49 3 J J J J Pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key. This ma chine starts sc anning the docu ment into m emory. Th e e- mail send oper ation starts after the scanning operation is co mplete. When scanning is complete, the Communicating indi cator lights and transmiss ion star ts.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 50 3 Confirming Reception When Retur n Receipt is set under “ E- mai l O pti on s ” , the receiver sends back a retu rn rec eipt me ssage .
Cancel ing Interne t Fax Transmis sion 51 3 Cancel ing Internet Fax Transmiss ion When fa x and Inte rnet Fa x desti na- tions are specified simultaneously, you ca n cancel se nding using the same meth od. Note ❒ You cannot canc el a transmission once scanning is c omplete.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 52 3 Rece iving Internet Fax Yo u can rece ive e- mail do cume nts by Int erne t Fa x. There are tw o methods of receivi ng e- mail: Au to E-ma il Reception an d Ma nu al E -m ail Rec ept io n. Limitati on ❒ E-m ail wi th atta chm en ts othe r tha n TIFF-F format files cannot be re- ceived.
Receiv ing Inter net Fax 53 3 B B B B Pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key. Acce sses the server to check for e- mail. E-mail is in the server A Start printing and rec eiving in the memory. If the receiving is finished, t he standby display appear s.
Using In ternet Fax Fu nctions 54 3 Received Image s Here is an example of an Int ernet Fax m essage sent from this mac hine and re- ceived on a c omputer using Out look e-mail softwa re. The re ceiv ed im age va rie s acco rdi ng to e-mai l sof twa re.
55 4. Programming Initial Setti ngs and Adjustme nts You can send informati on to the other party wh en tran smit ting or rec eivin g a fax messag e. Thi s info rmation is show n on the d ispla y of the other m a- chine and pri nted as a report. The fo l- lowing information can be sent.
Programmi ng 56 4 Programming A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel ect [ F ax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Init ial Se tting s and Adju stme nts 57 4 Refe re nce "Entering Text", Ge neral Set- tings Guide. Programming an Ow n Fax Number A Sele ct [ Own Fax N umbe r ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Programmi ng 58 4 E E E E Sel ect [ Fax Head er ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key. All charac ters a re de leted. G G G G Enter the c h aracte rs you want to program, and th en press the { { { { OK } } } } key .
Init ial Se tting s and Adju stme nts 59 4 E E E E Sel ect [ Fax Head er ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key. All registered ch aracters are delet- ed.
Programmi ng 60 4 Programming Fax Numbers and E-mail addres ses You can program fax destinations using Address Book Managemen t in the Key Operator T ools menu under System S ettings. You can also register the programm ed fax numbe rs and e-m ail addresses in a Grou p.
61 5. Troubleshooting Adjusting the Volume You ca n ch ange t he vol ume o f th e fol- lowing sounds that the machine make s. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ On Ho ok Mode Heard when the { { { { On Hook Dia l } } } } key is pressed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ At Trans mission Heard when the machine sends a message.
Troubl eshootin g 62 5 G G G G You can ad just the volume using { { { {W W W W} } } } or { { { {V V V V} } } } . Note ❒ You can adj ust the volume by seven levels. H H H H Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Note ❒ Press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key to cancel setting and the display returns to that of step E .
When { Facsi mile } Ke y Is Lit in R ed 63 5 When { { { { Facs imile } } } } Key Is Lit in Red If thi s key is lit, pr ess the key to ent er th e facsi mile mode. Then, r efer to the ta ble below and take the appro priate acti on. Probl em Solut ions A facsimile error has occurred .
Troubl eshootin g 64 5 When Toner Runs Out When t he machine has run out of to n- er, t he s ymb ol app ear s on t he di spl ay. Note that even if ther e is no toner left, you can still send fax messages.
Erro r Messages and Thei r Meanings 65 5 Error Messages and Their Meanings If there is an erro r, one of the following messages may appear on the display. If other message appears, follow the message. Me ssage Cause s and so lutio ns Put or iginal back, check it and pr ess St art ke y.
Troubl eshootin g 66 5 Ch eck wh ethe r ther e ar e any ne twor k prob lems . [14-0 9] E-mail transmissi on was refused by SMTP au- thentica tion or POP before S MTP authentica- tion.
Erro r Messages and Thei r Meanings 67 5 - - - - Out o f paper dis play me ssage If the paper tray runs out of paper, “ Out of paper. Loa d it, then press [Ex- it].
Troubl eshootin g 68 5 Solv ing Problems This table lists some common problems and their solutions. Probl em Causes and solu tions Reference Image back ground appears dirty w hen received at the oth er en d. Im ag es from th e back page appe ar. Adjust scan densi ty.
Solving Pr oblems 69 5 When using O n Hook Dial or Manual Dial , " Rec eiving " appear s and transmission i s not a llo wed . If the ma chine f ails to detect the size of the original when the { { { { Start } } } } key is presse d, it performs a rec eiving opera- tion.
Troubl eshootin g 70 5 When Th ings Don't Go as Expected I Want... Operation Reference to cancel a Mem ory Transmi s- sio n. If the or iginal is being scanned, pr ess the { { { { Clear/St op } } } } key.
71 INDEX A Adj us ting th e V olu me , 61 At Dialin g , 61 At Pr inting , 61 At Rece ption , 61 At Transm ission , 61 On Hook Mode , 61 Attach Subje ct , 45 Au tho riz ed R ec ep tion , 42 Auto E-m ai.
72 GB GB B168- 8600 Q Quick Dial Specifyin g a destination , 30 Specifying a g roup of destinations , 30 R Receive d Image s , 54 Reception , 38 Auto Recepti on , 38 Manua l Re ceptio n , 38 Registration Number , 34 Resolution , 23 Return Receipt , 45 RTI->Own Name , 55 S Scan Se ttings , 23 Standard , 23 Switch ing the Recep tion Mode , 38 T T.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness= 80 µ m // Pag es in book =112 // Print sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =112 // P rint sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.48 0000 mm Int roduc ti on This manual d escribes detaile d inst ructi ons on the opera tion and notes about the u se of th is mac hine.
i Manuals f or This Machine The follow ing manuals descr ibe the operatio nal procedures of thi s machine. For particular functions, see the r e levant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are sp ecific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBi nder V2 Lite Des kT opB inde r V 2 L ite is a ut ilit y i ncl uded on t he CD -RO M l abe led “ Scanner Dr iver & Do cume nt M ana ge men t U til itie s ” .
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manua ls for This Mach ine .... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... .... i How to Rea d This Manua l . ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... .....
iv Print ed Report ....... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ... 31 Memory Storage Rep ort ...... ....... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ......
v LAN-Fax Operation Messages .......... .......... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... .......... . 57 LAN-Fax Error Report ...... ....... .......... ...... ........... ...... .......... .......... ....... .......... ....... .... 57 LAN-Fax Result by E-mail .
vi 9. Appendix Con necting t he Machine to a Teleph one Line a nd Telephone . ....... .... ........ .... 9 9 Connecting th e Telephone Line .... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... .......... .... 99 Selecting th e Line Type.
1 How to Read This Manual Sym bol s In th is manu al, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machin e without following t he in- struc tions unde r this symb ol.
2 Names of Major Options The following software p roducts are referred to using a gen eral name: • DeskTopBinder V2 Lit e and DeskTopBinder V2 Profession al → DeskTop- Binder V2 L ite/Professional Stel laC2-A Ecombin e-F_FM.
3 1. Transmission Mode Sending at a Speci fic Time (S end Later) Usin g this funct ion, yo u can ins truct the m achi ne t o dela y tr ansmis sion of your fax messag e until a spe cified la t- er time. This allows you to take ad- va nt age o f off -pe ak te lep ho ne charges without having to be by the machi ne at the ti me.
Transmi ssion Mod e 4 1 Note ❒ To c ancel the set ting, select [ Off ] , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . The display re turns to t hat of step C . E E E E Enter the time usin g the number keys, and then press (24 hr f o r- mat). Note ❒ If you enter a w rong number, press the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key, and then r eenter.
User Transmissi on 5 1 User Tran smissi on This func tion allow s you t o check eac h u ser o r de pa rtme nt's tra nsm is- sion history. To use t he function, you need to program a us er code (eight digits max.) for each user or depar t- m en t, to b e e nte re d be for e t ra ns m is- sion.
Transmi ssion Mod e 6 1 ❒ When can celing transmission by use r code , to de lete the pro- grammed user code, press the { { { { Clear /Stop } } } } key, and then the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. The dis play re turns to that o f step C .
E-ma il O pti ons 7 1 E-mail Options When us ing the Internet Fax functi on, you can make the following settings: • Attach S ubject You can ente r a subjec t for the e- mail you want to send. Note ❒ For convenie nce, progra m fre- quen tly us ed subj ects.
Transmi ssion Mod e 8 1 Fax Header Print In some case s, you may want the oth- er part y to re ceive a n unmarke d copy of your or iginal. To do this , switch Fax Header off. When the Fax H eader is set t o “ On ” , the st ored n ame is p rinted o n th e re- ceiv er's paper .
Label Insert ion 9 1 Labe l Inserti on With this functi on you can have the receiv er name p rinted on the m essage when it is received at the other end. The nam e will be print ed at the to p of the page and will be preceded by “ To: ” . Note ❒ When t here is an image around the area where the Label is to be print- ed, that image is deleted.
Transmi ssion Mod e 10 1 Stel laC2-A Ecombin e-F_FM.b ook Pa ge 10 Tu esday, J anuary 13, 2 004 1: 22 PM.
11 2. Communication Information After you have pressed t he { { { { Start } } } } key (after scanning origin als), you can check and ed it the dest ination or setti ngs of Me mory Transm ission. Yo u can al so can- cel a transmission, print a stored file and print a list of stored files.
Communicati on Info rmation 12 2 D D D D Pre ss [ De lete ] . The selected file is delet ed. The dis play re turns to that of st ep B . Note ❒ To quit transmission cancel, press [ No ] . ❒ To cancel another transmission, re peat fro m st ep B . E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Printi ng a List of Fi les in Memory (Pr int TX Standby File List) 13 2 Pri nting a List of Files in Memo ry (Print TX Standby Fil e List) Print this list if you want to fi nd out which fi les are stored in memory an d what thei r file numbers are. Know ing the file number can be useful (for ex- ample when erasing files).
Communicati on Info rmation 14 2 Check ing the Transmiss ion Resul t (TX File Status) You can brow se a part of the Trans- missio n Result Re port on the displa y. Note ❒ Only the transmission result of the last 100 comm unications (re cep- tions & tr ansmissions) are shown.
Checki ng the Reception Res ult (RX Fil e Status) 15 2 Check ing the Rece ption Res ult (RX Fi le Status) You can browse a part of the Recep- tion Resul t Repo rt on th e dis play. Note ❒ Only th e receptio n result of t he last 100 communic ations (recept ions & transmissions) are shown.
Communicati on Info rmation 16 2 Printing a File (Print TX Standby File) If you want to check t he contents of a file tha t is s tored in mem ory and n ot yet sen t, use this procedur e to p rint it out. Note ❒ You can also print file s that have not been successfully transmitted.
Printin g a File Received wi th Memory Lock (Pr int Memory Lock Fi le) 17 2 Pri nting a File Re ceived with M emory Loc k (Print Memory Lock File) Thi s is a secu rity func tion designed to prev ent u naut hor ized users fr om reading yo ur messages.
Communicati on Info rmation 18 2 D D D D Enter a 4 -digit Memo ry Lock ID usi ng the numb er key s, a nd th en pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key. The dis play re turns to that o f step C . Note ❒ If the Me mory Lock ID does not match, the message " Sp ecif ied code do es not match the prog ramm ed Me mory Loc k ID.
Printi ng the Journa l 19 2 Printing the Journal The Journal contains information about the last 50 commu nications (maximum) made by your machine. It is print ed auto matic ally aft er every 50 communic ations (recept ions & trans- mis sio ns). Yo u can als o prin t a copy of the Jour - nal at any time by fo llowing the p ro- cedure below.
Communicati on Info rmation 20 2 Journa l 1. Printing date Show s the date and time when the rep ort is printed. 2. Progr ammed sender name Shows the sender name p rogrammed for print ing. 3. Dat e Show s the trans mission or receptio n dat e. 4. Time Shows th e transmi ssion or r eceptio n star t ti me.
Printi ng the Journa l 21 2 6. Communication mode • For fax transmissions and receptions Af ter “ T ” for outgoing fax or “ R ” for ingoing fax, shows a commun ication mode .
Communicati on Info rmation 22 2 E-ma il Re cepti on Yo u can r ece ive I nternet Fax do cu- ments manuall y us ing the { { { { Job In for - mation } } } } key. Newly-arrived e-mail is print ed out w hen r eceived manually. Note ❒ E-m ail ca n als o be rece ived manu - ally using the User Function keys.
23 3. Other Transmission Features Handy Dialing Functions Chain Dial This allows you to compose a tel e- phone number from various parts, some of whic h may be stor ed in Quick Dials and some of which may be ente red using the numbe r keys. Note ❒ Maximum length of a tel ephone or fax number: 128 digits.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 24 3 Redial The machine st ores the las t 10 desti- na tions sp ecif ied. If you wa nt to se nd a message to a destination which you sent faxes to recently, the Redial f unc- tion save s you time by finding and entering the destinatio n again.
On Hook Dial 25 3 On Hoo k Dial The On Hook Dial functio n allows you to dial while hearing to ne from the internal spe aker. You can send a fax checkin g the co nnection. Note ❒ Th is fu nct io n is un av ail abl e in some countries. A A A A Place the origin al, and then sele ct the scan settings you require.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 26 3 Manual Dial The ex ternal telepho ne is r equired. Pick up the handset of the externa l telephon e and dial. When the line is connected and you hear a h igh- pitche d tone, press the { { { { Sta rt } } } } key to send your fax message.
Transmiss ion Featur es 27 3 Transmiss ion Features Detec ting Blank Sheet Upon compl eti on of the f irst pag e scanning, an alar m sounds if the pa ge is nearly blank. W hen this happens, a message appears for a few se conds. The message di ffers depen d ing on numbe r of pa ges to be scann ed and transmission mode.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 28 3 More Transmission Functions If Memory Runs Out Whil e Storing an Origin al If memory runs out while storing or sending an original (free space reach- es 0%), one of the following m essages appears. Press [ Exit ] to tr ansm it stored pages only.
More T ransmission Funct ions 29 3 Checki ng the Transmis sion Result • Turn the Transmission Result Re- port on if you want a report to be print ed afte r every succe ssful transm ission. See p.31 “ Transmis- sion Result Report (Memory Transmission) ” .
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 30 3 Note ❒ Note that during Immed iate Trans- missio n or w hen in U ser To ols mode, the m achine cannot scan an origin al. JBIG Tran smiss ion If yo u use JB IG (Jo int Bi- lev el Ima ge Ex pert s Gr oup) com pres sio n, you can send ph otographic origina ls faster than w ith other m etho ds of compre s- sion.
Printed Report 31 3 Printed R eport Memory S torage Report Thi s rep or t is pr in ted af ter a n orig ina l is st ored in memo ry. It he lps you re- view the conten ts and the destina- tio ns of stored origi nals. Limitati on ❒ If you use Par allel Memory Trans- mis si on, t he Me mory Sto rage Re- port is n ot printe d.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 32 3 Communication Fa ilure Report This re port is pri nted whe n a message cou ld no t be su ccess fully tran smitted with Memory Transmission. If the machine is set up to prin t a Trans mission Res ult Report , this re- port is not printed.
33 4. Reception Features Rece ption Imme dia te Receptio n Each page of a fax messa ge i s prin ted as soon as it is received. This method is used for standard fax messages.
Re ce pti on Fe at ure s 34 4 Importa nt ❒ Whe n abou t on e hou r pass es af ter power of the machi ne is turn ed off, all fax messages stored in memor y will be lost. If any mess ages h ave been los t for t his r eason , a Po wer Failu re R eport is automa tically printe d when th e operati on swi tch is turned on.
Recept ion 35 4 Receiving mes sages uncon ditionally If one of t he conditi ons liste d below occur s, the machi ne receiv es all fax messag- es using S ubstitu te Recepti on.
Re ce pti on Fe at ure s 36 4 Reception Functions Forwar ding Receiv ed Docume nts This mach ine can forward rece ived documents to oth er destin ations pro- gram med in memory b ased on Own Name, Own Fax Number or sender's e-mail address.
Reception Fu nctions 37 4 SMTP Reception Using Inter net Fax Yo u can s et S MTP recepti on w ith thi s mac hine. W i t h S M T P r e c e p t i o n , e - m a i l i s r e c e i v e d a s s o o n a s i t i s s e n t t o t h e e - m a i l a d d r e s s set by the machi ne.
Re ce pti on Fe at ure s 38 4 Routing E-mail Received via SMTP E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines. It can also be routed to destinat ions pro grammed as Quic k Dial entr ies or Group s.
Reception Fu nctions 39 4 - - - - Spec ifyin g E-mail Transfer The originato r can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by spec- ifying t he e-mail address as follows: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Number fax=destination fax number @host name of this mach ine.
Re ce pti on Fe at ure s 40 4 Printi ng Optio ns Print Comple tion Beep When this function is t urned on, the machine beeps to let you know whe n a received message has been printed. Note ❒ You ca n alter the vo lum e of the beep or turn it off completely (set the volum e to the mi nimu m leve l) .
Pri ntin g Op tion s 41 4 Reception Time You ca n have the da te and time print- ed at the bo ttom o f the mess age when it i s receive d. Yo u can tur n this f unc- tion on or off using R eception Set- tings. S ee p.67 “ Rec ep tio n S et tin gs ” .
Re ce pti on Fe at ure s 42 4 Page Separ ation and Length Reduction When t he size of a rec eived message is long er than th e paper l oaded in the machi ne, each page of the m essage can be split and pr inted o n several sheets , or reduced and pri nted on a single sheet.
Pri ntin g Op tion s 43 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Prior ity Ta ble • KK and LL indica te that the message is split over two pages of paper wi th the o rientat ion and siz e shown. Paper select priority may diff er if no page separat ion threshold is set. Note ❒ Widths t hat this m achine ca n re- cei ve are A 4, B4 JIS, and A3.
Re ce pti on Fe at ure s 44 4 Just size printing Received do cuments ar e pr inted on the paper th at has firs t priority (se e p.43 “ Pr iorit y T able ” ). Th is f uncti on is set using "User Parameters"(s witch 05,bit 05). The default is Off .
45 5. Using Fax with Computers Sendi ng Fax Docum ents from Comput ers The optional printer /scanner unit is required. Using computers connec ted to the mach ine through par allel ports, IEEE 1394 (IP.
Using Fax with Co mputers 46 5 Before Use To use these features, a LAN-Fax D river must be installed on your computer. Use t he LAN -Fax driver inc luded on th e printer CD-R OM. You m ust also m ake the re quired compu ter to fax netw ork setti ngs on the ma chine, acc ording to th e typ e of co nnec tio n.
Sendi ng Fax Documents from Comput ers 47 5 ❒ Auto Run might not work auto- matic ally with certai n OS setti ngs. If this is the case, doubl e-clic k “ Set - up.
Using Fax with Co mputers 48 5 Applications Store d on t he CD-ROM This sect ion provid es informati on about LAN -Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-F ax Cov er Sh eet Ed i- tor.
Sendi ng Fax Documents from Comput ers 49 5 When this m achine is conn ected to a netwo rk, selection s for the optio n configuration ar e automatically per- formed. For details, see Help. Note ❒ If th e opti ons o n this m achi ne are not confi gured as instructed, LAN- Fax fu nctions may f ail to work as inte nded.
Using Fax with Co mputers 50 5 B B B B Sel ect [ LAN-Fax M5 ] in [ Pr inte r Name ] . C C C C Click [ OK ] . The LAN -Fax dialog box appears. Note ❒ The se tting method may d iffer depending on th e application you are using. In all cases, select [ LAN-Fax M5 ] for the pr inter .
Sendi ng Fax Documents from Comput ers 51 5 B In the [ Name: ] lis t select [ Con- tact ] , [ Company ] , o r [ G roup ] , an d then select [ Al l ] or an initial let- ter. The destinations matching the selec ted parame ters appe ar. C Cl ic k th e d es ti na tio n to hi gh - light i t, and the n click [ Set as Des tin a tio n ] .
Using Fax with Co mputers 52 5 Spe ci fyin g optio ns You can spec ify the following op- tion s: For details, see Help. • Sending at Specific Time • User Code • User ID • Print Fax Header A A A A Click [ Opt ion... ] . B B B B Specify options you w ant to use.
Sendi ng Fax Documents from Comput ers 53 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Web B row ser • ID • User ID • Status • Page(s ) • Star ted At • Document No. Refere nce For d etails, see He lp. Printing and Saving Yo u can p rint docu ments created us- ing Windo ws applications.
Using Fax with Co mputers 54 5 G Enter a file name . Note ❒ You ca n also change the fol d- er in this step. H Click [ Save ] . The image file is saved in the speci fied folder. Edit ing Address Book You c an prog ram and edi t des tin a- tions in the address list using the Ad- dres s B ook .
Sendi ng Fax Documents from Comput ers 55 5 Note ❒ The confi rma tion d ial og box does not appear when you have not m ade any changes aft er starting Address Book.
Using Fax with Co mputers 56 5 Note ❒ Cover she et d ata i s stor ed in its own for mat (u sing "fc p" as its ex- tension) A A A A On th e [ Star t ] menu, point to [ Pro - grams ] , [ LAN-Fax Util ities ] , and then cli ck [ LAN- Fax Cover Sheet Editor ] .
Sendi ng Fax Documents from Comput ers 57 5 LAN-Fax Oper ation Me ssages Note ❒ You c an have the LAN-Fa x Er ror Repo rt p rinte d when opti ons a re not p rop- erly se lected, or there is a communication error with a computer. S ee p.76 “ User Para meters ” (swi tch 20, bit 0).
Using Fax with Co mputers 58 5 Edit ing Receiv er's Fax Information Via Web Br owser Wh en th e re cei ve r being pro- gram med or a dded to th e add ress bo ok is a T.37 f ull m ode compati ble type with the Inte rnet F ax fun ction, you can s et the fol lowing r eceiver's fa x in for mat io n u sin g a We b br ow ser .
Editing Receiver 's Fax Infor mation Via Web Br owser 59 5 B Under [ I ntern et Fax Data Format ] , set the items of fax information to meet the rece iver's specific a- tions, exc ept for [ Select mode ] . Note ❒ If [ Simple mode ] is select ed, the fax information cannot be set.
Using Fax with Co mputers 60 5 Stel laC2-A Ecombin e-F_FM.b ook Pa ge 60 Tu esday, J anuary 13, 2 004 1: 22 PM.
61 6. Facsimile Features Function List The Use r Tools allow you to p rogram your ident ification, store freque ntly used numb ers and se ttings, and c ustomize d efault setti ngs to meet your nee ds. The User Tools are grouped by functions so that you can quickly and easily find the de sire d Use r Tool .
Facsimil e Features 62 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ E-mail Setti ngs ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator To ols - - - - Displa ys • Press the { { { { User To ols/Counter } } } } key to enter User Tool s menu. • You can switch the display using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } .
Fu ncti on Li st 63 6 - - - - Key Operator Cod e When Key Operator Code is pr ogramm ed and turn ed on, user s have to enter a prog rammed Ke y Op erator Code (eight di gits ma ximum) to o perat e the User Tools. This prevents unauthoriz ed people from changing settings.
Facsimil e Features 64 6 Acces sing U ser T ools (Facsi mile Fea tures) Customize th e facsimile settings ac - cording to the operations to be fre- quent ly perfo rmed. Note ❒ Cus tom ized fa csim ile d efau lts are kept until the defaults are changed again.
Accessi ng User Tools ( Facsimil e Featu res) 65 6 E E E E Follow the displayed instructions to cha nge the def ault, and th en pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Depending on the menu, you m ay nee d to r epe at st ep E . When you hav e sele cted the pri nt menu, press the { { { { Star t } } } } key to prin t.
Facsimil e Features 66 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Pri nt TX Stand by Fi le Li st (P rint Transmissio n Standby F ile List) Use t his f uncti on to print t he tra ns- mission standby file list. A Sel ect [ Print TX Standby Fil e List ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key .
Accessi ng User Tools ( Facsimil e Featu res) 67 6 • Print TX Status Report (Print Transmission St atus Report) • Manual E-mail Rece ption A Select User Function key yo u wan t to prog ram. B Select the func tion you wa nt to program i n the User Function key, a nd then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Facsimil e Features 68 6 E-mail Set tings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Internet Fax Setti ngs You ca n select to displa y [] or not. When you w ant to send an In- terne t Fax, set O n to display the icon .
Accessi ng User Tools ( Facsimil e Featu res) 69 6 A Sel ect [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter the sen ding e-mail ad- dress with trans mission permis- sion. C Press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Facsimil e Features 70 6 Stel laC2-A Ecombin e-F_FM.b ook Pa ge 70 Tu esday, J anuary 13, 2 004 1: 22 PM.
71 7. Key Operator Setting Key Opera tor T ools L ist You can also set the line type for the m achine connection, program Memo ry Lock I D, fax destinations, and m any o ther items. In addition, you can check the num ber of docum ents tra nsmitted and recei ved.
Key Operator Set ting 72 7 Using Ke y Oper ator Set ting s Counters Thi s functi on allo ws y ou to chec k the tota l number of pages transmi tted and rece ived on the di splay. • Transmissions: Total number o f tra nsmitted pag es • Recep tions: Total numbe r of rece ived page s A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 73 7 Note ❒ An e-mail address can be set as the forwarding desti nation. ❒ If you do not progr am an End Re- ceiver, the machine performs printing but not forwarding even with the F orwar ding func tio n On. ❒ You can pr ogram one of the User Func tion keys wi th oper atio ns for this functio n.
Key Operator Set ting 74 7 Note ❒ If t here is an End Rec eiver alr eady pro gra mmed , a re ceiv er na me is shown. If y ou want to change the receiver, press t he { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key and proceed t o step F . ❒ To cancel Forwarding, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key an d proceed to step G .
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 75 7 Memory Lock When you switch M emory Lock on, received messages are stored in mem- ory and no t printed auto matically. When a me ssage is received in the Mem ory Lo ck mod e, th e Rece ive F ile indicato r blinks. To prin t this mes- sage, enter the Memory Lock ID.
Key Operator Set ting 76 7 User Parame ters User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To change function se ttings, set the User Param eter Swit ches. Prep arat io n Acces s to some User Pa rameter Settin gs requir es othe r settin gs be mad e be- forehand.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 77 7 05 0 Receive S ervice Call ( SC) Conditio n (Subst itute R ecep- tion du ring servi ce call) Possibl e (Sub sti- tute RX) Not possible (Re- cepti on of f) 2, 1 Subs .
Key Operator Set ting 78 7 18 0 Print da te with Fax He ader Off On 1 Print transmitter origin with Fax Hea der Off On 2 Pri nt file number with F ax Head er Off On 3 Pri nt page num ber with Fax Head.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 79 7 Changing the User Parameters Importa nt ❒ We re comme nd you prin t and keep a User Par ameter list when you program or change a User Pa- rameter. See p.80 “ Printing the User Paramet er List ” . ❒ Do not change any bit switch es other tha n those sh own on the pr e- vious pages.
Key Operator Set ting 80 7 Printing the User Parameter List Print this lis t to see the current Us er Parameter settings. However, only it ems of im porta nce or often- used items ar e included in th e list. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 81 7 Home Position Items used for transmitting documents can be set as the hom e positions. When documents ar e scanned and transmiss ion is c ompleted, it ems automatica lly re- turn to thei r home posi tions.
Key Operator Set ting 82 7 Imp ort ant ❒ I f yo u tu rn th i s f un ct io n of f , t he sc al e o f th e o ri g in a l is m ai nt ai n ed an d some parts o f the image may be lost at the othe r end. • Fax Header Allows the fax header as the hom e position to b e set to on or off.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 83 7 Changing the Home Posi tion Note ❒ For details about setting parame- ters, see p.76 “ User Par ame ters ” . Fol low the p rocedure below to set the home posi tion par ameters. Importa nt ❒ Do not change any bit switch es oth er than th ose sho wn in th e above table.
Key Operator Set ting 84 7 Speci al Send ers t o Treat Differ ently By progr amm in g pa rtic ula r re ceiv ers in advance, you can set the following function for each receiver: • Aut horized Rece ption • Forwarding • Mem ory Lock Use the Own Na me or Own Fax Nu mber to progr am your rece ivers.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 85 7 ❒ You cannot use t he following func- tions wi th Interne t Fax receptio ns. • Aut horized Rece ption • Memory L ock ❒ To use t he Fo rwarding, w ith I nter- net Fax receptions, program the e- mail address of the sender.
Key Operator Set ting 86 7 Refere nce p.91 “ P rogra mm ing a Me mo ry Lock ID ” Lim i tati on ❒ If y ou pro gra m th e same sen der in Memo ry Lock a nd Forward- ing, Forwarding is d isabled. Progra mming/ Cha nging Special Sen ders A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 87 7 I I I I Select the i tem you want to pro- gram using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Note ❒ You must select only the item you want to program. ❒ To cancel these sett ings, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Key Operator Set ting 88 7 D Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The d isplay re turns to that of Step I . Note ❒ After you perform ste p J , se t "Forwardi ng" of “ Receptio n Settings ” to "O n". See p.67 “ Reception S ettings ” .
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 89 7 D D D D Sel ect [ Pr ogr am Sp ec ial S en de r ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } ke y. E E E E Sel ect [ Delete Special Sen der ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d t hen p ress t he { { { { OK } } } } ke y.
Key Operator Set ting 90 7 F F F F Select the fu nction you w ant to program. Note ❒ In this feature, “ Autho rized R e- cept io n ” has the same settings as “ Reception Settings ” .
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 91 7 E E E E Sel ect [ P rint S pecial Sen der Lis t ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } ke y. Note ❒ To cancel pr inting, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Key Operator Set ting 92 7 E E E E Enter an ID using the number keys, and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { {# # # #} } } } key . Note ❒ If you make a mistake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key before pressing the { { { { OK } } } } key, an d th en tr y again.
Usi ng Key Operator Sett ings 93 7 G3 Analog Line You ne ed to make the fo llowi ng set- tings fo r the G 3 An alog Line be fore you connect the machin e to a stan d- ard G3 analog line. • When your machine is connec ted through a PA BX, set to Ext ension.
Key Operator Set ting 94 7 B Select the i tem using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and th en press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Selectable items diffe r depend- ing on the mac hine de stin at ion. or The d isplay re turns to that of step A .
95 8. Solving Operation Problems When An Error Report is Printed An Erro r Repor t is pr inted if a mes- sage cann ot be successfully sent or re- ceiv ed. Poss ible ca uses in clude a pr oblem with you r machine o r noise on the tel - ephone line. If an error occurs during transm ission, resen d the original.
Solving Oper ation Problems 96 8 Turning Off the Main Po wer/In Case of a Power Fa ilure R CAUT ION: Even if the main power switch is turned off, the contents of t he ma- chine memory (for ex ample, pro- grammed numbers) will not be lost.
When an Error Occurs Using I nternet Fax 97 8 When an Erro r Occurs Using Inte rnet Fax Err or Ma il Noti ficat ion The m achine sen ds the Er ror Mail No tification to the send er wh en it is un able to successful ly rece ive a particul ar e-mail messag e.
Solving Oper ation Problems 98 8 Stel laC2-A Ecombin e-F_FM.b ook Pa ge 98 Tu esday, J anuary 13, 2 004 1: 22 PM.
99 9. Appendix Connec ting the Ma chine to a Tele phone Line and Telephone Connect ing the Telep hone Line To conne ct the mach ine to a telephone l ine, use a snap-in modular type connec- tor. Importa nt ❒ Make sure the co nnector is the corr ect t ype b efore yo u s tart.
Appendi x 100 9 Speci ficatio ns ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Transmi ssion and Reception ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power Consumpt ion *1 *1 Th e ma ch ine co nf igur at ion is m ai n u ni t wi th t h e AD F f ax unit , p ri nte r/ sca nne r u nit , and pa per tra y unit.
Specifi cations 101 9 *1 Suppor ted fo r A4 or sm aller si ze do cument. Compatible Machi nes This machine can co mmunicate wi th Inter net Fax machines that meet th e follow- ing specification requ irements. *1 Available in f ull mode, depen ding on the o ther party's s etti ngs.
Appendi x 102 9 Accept able Types of Original s Make sure you r original s are comple tely dr y before sett ing them in the mac hine. Wet ink or corr ecting fluid fr om originals will mark the exposure glass and affec t th e r esu ltin g ima ge.
Specifi cations 103 9 Limitati on ❒ There may be a differenc e in the size of the image w hen it is printed at the des- tinati on. ❒ If you place an origi nal larger than A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" on the exposure gla ss, only an A 4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" area is scanned.
Appendi x 104 9 Maximum Values The following list co ntains the maxi mum value for each item. Note ❒ The ma ximum num ber of pages th at can be stor ed or transm itt ed may de - crease depending on the cont ents of documents.
105 INDEX A Addres s Book , 48 Applica tions Stor ed on the CD -ROM , 48 Au tho riz ed R ec ep tion , 67 , 85 Auto Fa x Recep tion P ower- up , 39 Automatic Redi al , 29 Auto Redu ce , 81 Auto run pro.
106 AE AE B168-86 58 L Label In sertion , 9 LAN-F ax Cover Sh eet Edi tor , 48 Driver , 48 Er ror R epor t , 57 Oper ation Messag es , 57 Properti es, Settin g , 48 Result by E-mail , 57 Line Type Se .
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness= 80 µ m // Pag es in book =112 // Print sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.48 0000 mm Int roduc ti on This manual d escribes detaile d inst ructi ons on the ope ration and not es about the u se of t his mac hine.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G 100(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =112 // P rint sc ale=81% Gap (w hen print ed at 81% s cale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.
Network Guide For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it.
Introduction This manu al describes detailed i nstruction s on the oper ation and notes about the use of this machin e. To ge t maximum versatili ty from thi s mach ine all operators a re reques ted to re ad this m anual c arefully and fo llow the in struction s.
i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular functions, s ee the relevant pa rts of the manual . Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Sc anner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, an d the operatin g environment for De skTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ......... ......... ......... ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...
iv 5. Usin g the Printe r Func tion Printing wi th Windows ... ........ ......... ....... ......... ....... .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... . 47 Printing wi th a Windo ws 2000/XP, Windo ws Server 2 003 or Window s NT 4 .0 Prin t Server .
v Understanding Di splayed Informati on ...... ........... ............ ........... ........... .......... 105 Print J ob Inf ormati on .. ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... ......... ....... ...... ...... ......... ....... ...... ........ 10 5 Print L og Info rmatio n .
vi.
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the followin g symbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situatio n which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
2 Names of Major Components and Sof tware The following software products ar e referred to using a general name: • DeskT opBinder V2 Lite an d D eskTop Binder V2 profession al → Des kTo p- Binder .
3 1. Functions Available over a Netwo rk This ma chine pro vides printe r, LAN-F ax, Inter net Fax , an d scann er functions over a network. Using the Printer The network i nterface board is compatible with NetWare *1 (IPX/SPX, TCP/IP), Windows NT 4.
Functions Available over a Network 4 1 Using Fax Inter net Fax This machine converts s canned document images to e-mail format and transmits the data over the Internet. Specify the e-mail add ress instead of the fa x number, and then send the docu- men t.
Using Fax 5 1 LAN-Fax You can fax documents over phone lines from any computer connected to the machine via Ethern et, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1 394), or IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN). To send a fax, print from the Windows application you are working with, select LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify the destin ation.
Functions Available over a Network 6 1 Network Scanner E-mail Scan f ile atta ched to an e-mail c an be sent usin g the e- mail syst em throug h a LAN or the In ternet. Reference For details abo ut what settin gs to make, see p .15 “ Setting Up the Machine on a Network ” .
Network Scanner 7 1 Network Delivery Scanner You can use the machine as a delivery scanner for ScanRouter V2 Lite / Profes- sional. Scan file or document received by fax can be stored in the delivery server, or de- livered via the network to specified folders on client computers.
Functions Available over a Network 8 1 Network T WAIN Scanner You can use the scann ing function of this mach ine from a computer connec ted via a netw ork (Ethernet, IEEE 13 94(IP over 13 94), or IEEE 802 .11b (wireless LAN)). You can sc an documents the same way you would if you wer e using a scanner connect ed directly to your compu ter.
9 2. Connecting the Network Cable to the Network Confirming the Connection 1. 10BASE-T/100BASE -TX port Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE- TX cable 2.
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 10 2 Connectin g to the Etherne t Inter face The network interface board supp orts 10BASE-T or 1 00BASE-TX connec- tions. A A A A Turn o ff the main pow er switch. Important ❒ Make sure the main po wer is off.
Confirming the Connection 11 2 Connectin g to the IEEE 13 94 Inter face Important ❒ Before mak ing the conne ction, touch the metallic part to ground your self. Note ❒ Use the inter face cable sup plied with the IE EE 1394 interfac e board (optional).
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 12 2 Confirming the Connect ion A A A A Make s ure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b card is l it. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When using in infrastructure mode 1. If it is conne cte d pro per ly t o th e network, the LED is green when in infrast ructure mode.
Confirming the Connection 13 2 Check ing the m achine's radio wav e statu s When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave status using the contr ol panel. Note ❒ To check the radio wave s tatus, se- lect [ IEEE 802.
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 14 2.
15 3. Setting Up the Machine on a Network User Tools Menu ( System Settings) This section describes the network se ttings you c an change with User Too ls (Sys- tem Set tings) . Make sett ings acc ording to fu nctions you want to use and th e in- terface to be connected.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 16 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 interface b oard (optional ) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (optiona l) is install ed. If Ethernet and IEEE 802.1 1b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected interface has p riority.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 17 3 Inter net Fax Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se ttings/ Network See p.2 8 “ Interfa c e Settings /Network ” . IP Ad dress $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *5 $ LAN T ype *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Na me ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 18 3 IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) Interface Settings/ IEEE 1394 *1 See p.2 9 “ Interfa c e Settin gs/IEEE 1394 ” . IP Ad dress $ WINS Configuration ❍ IP ove r 1394 $ Host Na me ❍ Domain Name ❍ Interface Settings/ Network See p.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 19 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 interface b oard (optional ) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (optiona l) is install ed. If Ethernet and 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, th e select- ed int erface has prio rity.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 20 3 E-mail Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se ttings/ Network See p.2 8 “ Interfa c e Settings /Network ” . IP Ad dress $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *3 $ LAN T ype *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Na me ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 21 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 interface b oard (optional ) is install ed. *2 App ears w hen the 802. 11b unit (opt ional) i s inst alled . If Ethernet and 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, th e select- ed int erface has prio rity.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 22 3 Network Delivery Scanner Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Se ttings/ Network See p.2 8 “ Interfa c e Settings /Network ” .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 23 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 interface b oard (optional ) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (optiona l) is install ed. If Ethernet and IEEE 802.1 1b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected interface has p riority.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 24 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 interface b oard (optional ) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (optiona l) is install ed. If Ethernet and 802.11b (wireless LAN) are both connected to the machine, th e select- ed int erface has prio rity.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 25 3 Networ k Config uration Any change you make with User Tool s rem ains in ef fect e ven if t he main power sw itch or operation switch is turne d off, or the { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key is presse d.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 26 3 Configuring the network using othe r utilities As well as using the control panel to make network settings, utilities such as a We b br ow ser a nd Sm art Dev ic eMo nit or for Adm in ca n al so b e us ed .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 27 3 *1 You can make the TCP/IP settings if SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is communi- cati ng wi th t he mac hine using IPX /SPX . *2 You can make the IP X/SPX setting s if SmartD eviceMonit or for Admin is communi- cati ng w ith t he m achin e us ing T CP/I P.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 28 3 Settings You Can Change w ith User Tool s Interfa ce Settings /Network ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ IP Address Before using this machine in the netw ork envi ronme nt, yo u must configure the I P address and sub- net ma sk.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 29 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Effective Protocol Select the protoco l to use in the network. • TCP/IP :Effective/Invalid • NetWare:Effective/Invalid • SMB:Effective/Inva.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 30 3 ❒ When you use the IEEE 1394 in- terf ace on a n etwork , you can - not use the Ethernet interface in the same domain. To use both interfaces in the same domain, set di fferent v alues fo r [ Sub-net Mask: ] .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 31 3 Interfac e Settin gs/IEEE 802.11b Preparation You must install the IEEE 802.11b unit (optional) into the machine. Note ❒ Be sure to make all settings simul- taneo usly. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Communication M ode Specifies the communication mode of th e wireless LAN.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 32 3 Interface Settings/Print I/F Settings List You can check i tems rel ated t o the network in use. Reference For details about printin g, see p.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 33 3 ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ On ] : If the authentica- tion meth od is CRAM -MD5. ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ Of f ] : If th e authentica- tion method is PLAIN, or LOGIN. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ POP before SMTP You can config ure POP authentica- tion (POP before SMTP).
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 34 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator' s E-mail Add. If the sender is n ot specified on e- mailed scanned documents, this appears as the s ender ’ s add ress . This can be used as the sender with SMTP authentication for Internet Fax.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 35 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Mail Reception Account Spec ify [ E-mail Address ] , [ User Name ] , and [ Password ] for receiving Inte rnet f axes. • E-mail Address • User Name • Password Limitatio n ❒ Enter an e-mail address using up to 12 8 alphanumeric charac- ter s.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 36 3 Delet ing a su bject A Select [ Del ete ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Select the subject using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
37 4. Windows Configuration Configuring TCP/I P This de scribes how to configure W in- dows for TCP/IP and IPP. Configur ing a Windows 95/98/Me Comput er Follow t he procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows 9 5/98/Me compu- ter to use TCP /IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then doubl e-click the Networ k icon.
Windows Configuration 38 4 Configur ing a Windows XP Computer Follow t he procedure belo w to co n- figur e a Win dows XP comp uter to use TCP/IP. A A A A On the [ Star t ] me nu , cl ick [ Control Pan el ] , and then click [ Network and Internet Connections ] .
Configuring TCP/IP 39 4 Configur ing a Windows NT 4.0 Computer Follow t he procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows NT 4. 0 computer to use TCP/IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then doubl e-click the Networ k icon. Make sure [ TCP/IP Prot ocol ] is se- lected in the [ Netwo rk protocols ] box on the [ Protoc ols ] tab.
Windows Configuration 40 4 Configuring NetBEUI This de scribes how to configure W in- dows to use Ne tBEUI . Limi tation ❒ NetBEU I cannot be used und er Windows XP. Note ❒ NetBEUI appears as SMB in the control p anel, manual, and rel ated utilities.
Configuring NetBEUI 41 4 Configur ing a Windows NT 4.0 Computer Follow t he procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows NT 4. 0 computer to use Net BEUI. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then doubl e-click the Networ k icon. Make su re [ NetBEUI Protocol ] is listed in the [ Network protoco ls ] box on t he [ Protocols ] tab.
Windows Configuration 42 4.
43 5. Using the Printer Function This section co ntains instructio ns f or config uring the machine as a n etwork printer. Read th e section that relates to your netw ork environm ent for info rma- tion about correct c onfiguration. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Se rver 2003, or Windows NT 4.
Using the Printer Function 44 5 • Print ing wi thout a print server Note ❒ Under W indow s XP, yo u cann ot print via NetB EUI us ing SM B. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Macintosh To set up the machine as a n etwork printer in a Macintosh environ ment, see p.
45 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with NetWare To set up the machine as a p rint server or remote printer in a N etWare envi- ronment, see p .53 “ Prin ting wi th Ne tWare ” . Th e network interface board al- lows you to use the machine as either a print server or a remote printer.
Using the Printer Function 46 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with UNIX For UNIX printing information, v isit our Web site or consul t your autho rized dealer.
Printing with Windows 47 5 Printing with Window s Printi ng with a Wind ows 2000/XP , W ind ows Serve r 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 Pri nt Server This describes how to configure a cli- ent computer on a network us ing Windows 2000/XP, Window s Server 2003, Windows NT 4.
Using the Printer Function 48 5 E E E E On the n etwork tree, double-click the nam e o f th e co mpu ter us ed as the print server. The printers connected t o the net- work are displaye d. F F F F Click the name of the pr inter you want to use, and then click [ OK ] .
Printing with Windows 49 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ NetBEU I Note ❒ Do not use NetB EUI un - der W indow s XP. A Click [ NetB EUI ] , and then click [ Se arch ] . Available printers are l ist- ed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then clic k [ OK ] .
Using the Printer Function 50 5 Stan dard TCP /IP Port A Cli ck [ Standard TCP/IP ] , and then click [ New Port ] . B In t he [ Add Standa rd TCP/IP Print- er Port Wizard ] dialog box, cli ck [ Next ] . C In t he [ Printer Name or IP Addr ess ] box, ent er the print er name or IP address, and then clic k [ Next ] .
Printing with a Macintosh 51 5 Printing with a Macintosh This des cribes ho w to config ure a Macint osh comp uter to use EtherTal k. Actua l procedure s may vary depending on the vers ion of the Mac O S. The f oll owin g proce dure s describe h ow to co nfigure Mac OS 9.
Using the Printer Function 52 5 Configur ing the Pr inter Use the control panel to activate the AppleTalk protocol. (The default is active.) Reference For more in formation about con- figuratio n, see p.
Printing with NetWare 53 5 Printing with NetWare This describes how to configure the machine for use a s a print server or remote printer in a NetWare environ- men t. This sectio n assumes NetWare is functional and the necessary environ- ment for the NetWare print service is available.
Using the Printer Function 54 5 H H H H Select the [ NetWa re ] check box, and then click [ Next > ] . I I I I Click [ Bindery Mode ] , enter th e file server na me in the [ File Server Name: ] box, an d then click [ Ne xt > ] .
Printing with NetWare 55 5 F F F F Click [ Wiza rd ] , and then click [ OK ] . G G G G If necessary, enter the print server name in the [ Device Nam e: ] box, and then click [ Next > ] . H H H H Select the [ NetWa re ] check box, and then click [ Next > ] .
Using the Printer Function 56 5 Using P ureIP in th e NetWa re 5/5.1, 6 enviro nment Note ❒ When not using IPX, it is recom- mended that you change the print server protocol in th e Web browser from [ TC P/IP+I PX ] to [ TCP/IP ] . A A A A Log on to the file server as an ad- ministrator, or equivalent.
Printing with NetWare 57 5 Note ❒ As co ntext, obj ect names are entered in lower object order and di vided by a per iod. For exampl e, if you want to cre- ate a pr int server into NET unde r d, e nter “ d ” . F In th e [ Prin t Serve r Operat ion Mode ] area, click [ As Print Serv - er ] .
Using the Printer Function 58 5 I I I I Enter “ PCONS OLE ” from t he com- mand prom pt. F:> PCONSO LE J J J J Create a print queue as follows: Note ❒ If you are using a cu rrently de- fined .
Printing with NetWare 59 5 M M M M Press t he { { { { ESC } } } } key until the “ Ex- it? ” appears, and then click [ Yes ] to qu it PCONSOL E. N N N N Start the prin t server by enterin g the fo llowing from the NetWa re server's keyb oard. If it is runni ng, res tart afte r quit- ting .
Using the Printer Function 60 5 Limitation ❒ Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characte rs ( “ - ” and “ _ ” can be used). E In the [ NDS Conte xt: ] bo x, en ter the context in which the print server is to be created. Limitation ❒ Enter up to 127 alphanumer- ic characters.
Printing with NetWare 61 5 E After checking the settings, click [ OK ] . M M M M Create a print server as follows: A Select t he context specified us- ing NIB Setup Tool (Step G G G G - B B B B ), and o n the [ Object ] me nu, click [ Create ] . B In the [ Class of new object ] list, click [ Print Serv er ] , and then click [ OK ] .
Using the Printer Function 62 5 Reference For more information about in- stalling the printer driv er, see Printer Ref erence 1 . Note ❒ An y port ca n be select ed d uring ins tal latio n. H owev er, L PT1 is recomm ende d. B B B B On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Set- tings ] , and then click [ Pr inter s ] .
Printing with NetWare 63 5 C C C C Insert the CD-ROM labeled “ Printer Drivers and Utilities ” into the CD-ROM drive, and then click [ Hav e Disk ] . If the setup menu starts automati- cally, y ou can pro ceed to the next step. If not, see Pr inter R eference 1 .
Using the Printer Function 64 5.
65 6. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client SmartDeviceMonitor for Client SmartDevic eMonitor for Client is equipped with the following functions. We recommend all users of this prin ter to install this software.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 66 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it do? • Peer-to-Peer print f unction • Print directly on the netw ork printer with out a print server. • Print on a substitute printer if to o many jobs accumu late in the specified printer, or if an e rror disables printing (Recovery Printing).
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 67 6 Reference For more information about using Recovery Printing/Parallel Printing, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 68 6 Displaying the Stat us of Machin es Follow the procedure below to monitor machine status using SmartDeviceMon- itor for Client. A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor fo r Client. B B B B The status of machines is d isplayed on the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.
69 7. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Adm in, not only can you monitor the status of network printers, bu t you can als o change the confi guration of the networ k in- terface board using TCP/IP or IP X/SPX p rotocol.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 70 7 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it do? • Limit settings done f rom the c ontrol panel, a nd dis able chan ges made to certain items . • Select of paper type loaded in the machine. • Switch to, and com e out of En ergy Saver mo de.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 71 7 Changin g the Network Interf ace Board Configur ation Limi tation ❒ Internet Explorer 4. 01 or a later ver- sion is required to use NIB Setup Tool. A A A A Start Smar tDevic eMon itor f or Ad- min. B B B B On the [ Group ] m enu , poin t to [ Searc h Devi ce ] , and the n click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SP X ] .
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 72 7 Lockin g the Contr ol Panel Menu A A A A Start Smar tDevic eMon itor f or Ad- min. B B B B On the [ Group ] m enu , poin t to [ Searc h Devi ce ] , and the n click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SP X ] . A list of machines appears.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 73 7 Managin g User Inf ormation A A A A Start Smar tDevic eMon itor f or Ad- min. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search D evice ] , and t hen cl ick [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch you want to change configuration .
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 74 7 Managin g Address Infor mation A A A A Start SmartDeviceMon itor for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search D evice ] , and t hen cl ick [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch you want to change configuration .
75 8. Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser You can chec k the s tatus of a m achine and ch ange its settings us ing the Web browser. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it do? You can remotely check the status of a machine or specify its settings over the network usi ng a computer's Web browser.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 76 8 Going to the Top Page 1. Header area You can reg ister favorite URLs u sing [ URL ] . To view the Help section, clic k [ Help ] . 2. Menu area These menus are for configuring the net- work inter face board and checking ma- chine status.
Types of Menu Configuration and Mode 77 8 Types of Menu Configurat ion and Mode Items that appear on the menu area d iffer between user mode and administrator mode . The work area which appears under the sele cted menu displays mach ine status under user m ode and machi ne status and settings und er administrat or mode.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 78 8 *1 You can make the IEEE 8 02.11b, IE EE 1394, or parallel interface settings. Y ou can also check the Eth ernet status. Reference For more information about displaying statu s and changing settings, see p.
Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings 79 8 Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In th e [ A ddress ] box, enter the ma- chine' s IP addre ss (for examp le http:/ /XXX.XX X,XXX,X XX, wh ere the Xs are th e numbers of the IP address ).
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 80 8 Configurin g the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In th e [ A ddress ] box, enter the ma- chine' s IP addre ss (for examp le http:/ /XXX.XX X,XXX,X XX, wh ere the Xs are th e numbers of the IP address ).
Using He lp on the Web Browser 81 8 Using Help on the Web Browse r Wh en us ing Help for t he fi rst time , clicki ng either [ Help ] in the header area or t he icon mar ked “ ? ” in the work area makes the following screen appear.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 82 8.
83 9. Appendix Remote Maintenance by telnet You can view p rinter st atus and co n- figure the network interface board us- ing telnet. Note ❒ You sh ould spe cify a p ass wor d so only the network adm inistrator, or a person w ith network ad ministra- tor pri vilege s, can use remo te mainte nance.
Appendix 84 9 Commands List Use the “ hel p ” command to d isplay remote maintena nce use. Note ❒ Enter “ hel p ” to display a list of commands that can be used. msh> help ❒ Enter “ help command_na me ” to display information about the syn- tax of that command.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 85 9 - - - - Address ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Subnet Mask A number us ed to numerical ly “ mask ” or hide the IP a ddress on the network by eliminat ing those parts of the address that are alike for all machines on the network.
Appendix 86 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Access control ini tialization msh > access fl ush Note ❒ This restores the factory de fault so all access ranges be come “ 0.0.0.0 ” . DHCP Use the “ dhcp ” command to con fig- ure the DHCP settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reference The fo llowi ng co mmand di splay s the current DHCP settings .
Remote Maintenance by telnet 87 9 Note ❒ I f y o u p r o h i b i t r e m o t e a c c e s s v i a TCP/IP and then lo g out, you can- not use re mote access.
Appendix 88 9 ❒ Default acce ss settings 1 and 2 are as follows: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display Shows SNMP informat ion and available protocols. msh > snmp ? The followin g command displays the settings of registered number specifi ed. msh> sn mp [ registe red_number ] Omit ting th e numbe r displa ys al l access set tings.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 89 9 Note ❒ To specify TCP/IP pro tocol, en- ter “ ip ” followed by a space, and then the I P address. ❒ To specify the I PX/SPX proto- col, enter “ ipx ” follo wed by a space, and then the IPX add ress followe d by a dec imal, and t hen the MAC address of the net- work interface board.
Appendix 90 9 Direct printing port The direct printing port allows print- ing directly fro m a computer, con- nected to th e network, to the p rinter. Use the “ dipr int ” comma nd to change direct printing po rt settings.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 91 9 SMB Use the “ smb ” co mmand to conf igure or delete the NetBEU I settings such as the computer na me or workgroup name. msh> smb parame ter Note ❒ You canno t use a comp uter name starting with “ RN P ” or “ rnp ” .
Appendix 92 9 SPRINT Use the “ sprint ” comma nd to v iew and configure SCSI p rint (SBP-2) on IEEE 1394. Limi tation ❒ You c an use th is function w hen the optional IEEE 1394 board is in- stalled.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 93 9 Note ❒ Wh en c han gi ng the in ter fa ce to IEEE 802.11b, see p.84 “ TCP/IP address ” . ❒ When configuring the IEEE 802.11b TCP/IP , see p.84 “ TCP/IP ad- dress ” . Changing the host name Use the “ hostname ” comman d to change the printer nam e.
Appendix 94 9 Note ❒ Enter the printer name using up to 15 characte rs. ❒ You cannot u se a printer name starting with “ RN P ” or “ rnp ” . ❒ The Ethernet interface and I EEE 802.11b int erface will hav e the same printer name. WINS Use the “ wins ” command t o config- ure WINS server settings.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 95 9 AutoNet Use the “ autonet ” comm and t o con- figure AutoN et settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display The fo llowi ng co mmand di splay s the current AutoN et settings. msh > autonet ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Configurat ion You ca n confi gure the AutoNet setting s.
Appendix 96 9 DNS Use the “ dns ” command to config ure or display DNS (Domain Name Sys- tem) sett ings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ View sett ing The fo llowi ng co mmand di splay s current DNS sett ings: ms.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 97 9 - - - - Setting Protocols The protoc ols described in this se c- tion provid e various functi ons that ca n be u sed on t he m ach ine. Important ❒ If a protocol is disabled or inactive, functions provided by that proto- col cannot be used.
Appendix 98 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ SNMP • Bidi rect ional communic ation func - tion u sing a prin ter driver • Function to obtain d evice infor- mation us ing SmartDeviceMon- itor for Client/Admin ❖.
Using DHCP 99 9 Using DHCP You can use the printe r in a DHCP en- vironment. You can also register the printer N etBIOS name o n a WINS server when it is ru nning.
Appendix 100 9 Note ❒ If a static address is not selec ted, or i s set to 0.0.0. 0, the inte rface using the address as signed by DHC P is use d. Note ❒ Printers that register the p rinter NetBIO S name on a WINS ser ver mus t be co nfigur ed fo r the WIN S server.
SNMP 101 9 SNMP The machine is equ ipped with an SNMP (Simple Network Management Proto- col) agent that operates under UDP and IPX on the Ethernet/wi reless LAN in- terface, and UDP on the IE EE 1394 ( IP over 1394) interface. Us ing the SNMP manager yo u can get inform ation about the m achine.
Appendix 102 9 Error Messages on the Display This sec tion describes the most comm on network-relat ed messages t hat appear on the display. If a message not described here appe ars, act according to that mes sage. Messages witho ut Code Numbers Reference Before turning the mai n power off, see “ Tur ning On the Power ” , Copy Refe r- ence .
Error Messages on the Display 103 9 Messages with Cod e Numbers Note ❒ A message reporting an error appea rs on the display as shown. Message Causes Solutions Co de numbers Cannot connect with DHCP server The DHCP server cannot be found. Check the D HCP server is running on the network.
Appendix 104 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Code Numbers The problem interface is displayed. • 1XX: Ethernet • 2XX: IEEE 802.11b • 3XX: IEEE 1394 • 0XX: Indepen dent of interface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Order of priority of me ssages (when multi ple errors occur) Order of interface priori ty • 1.
Understanding Displayed Information 105 9 Understanding Displayed Information This section des cribes how to read the status information returned by the net- work interface board. Print J ob Infor matio n Print job status can be viewed using the following commands: • telnet : Use the “ status ” command.
Appendix 106 9 Machine St atus and Configuratio n You can ch eck the machine s tatus and c onfiguration using telnet or UNIX. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ telnet Use the “ info ” or “ status ” command. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ UNIX Use the “ lpr ” or “ lpstat ” co mmand, or “ stat ” , “ info ” paramete r of rsh, rcp, or ftp.
Understanding Displayed Information 107 9 Machin e configuration Note ❒ “ * ” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting. ❒ Regarding *1-*5, see table below. Misma tch: Paper Size and Type Indi cated pa per tray d oes not c ontain pap er of selec ted s ize an d typ e.
Appendix 108 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *1 Inpu t Tray: Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *2 Input Tray : Paper Size ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *3 Inpu t Tray: Stat us Output Tray No. ID number of the output tray Nam e Name of the output tray *4 Statu s Current status of the output tray *5 Name Descr iption Tray X Name of installed paper tray (X is the number of tray.
Understanding Displayed Information 109 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *4 Output Tray: Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *5 Output Tray: Status Configur ing the Net work Inter face Board The network interface board settings can be displayed using the commands be- low. • telnet : Use the “ show ” c omm and.
Appendix 110 9 Apple Talk Mod e Apple Talk p rotoc ol se lecte d Net Network number Object Macintosh printer name Type The type o f print er Zone Name of zone the printer belongs to TCP/ IP Mod e “ Up ” m ean s ac tive , “ Down ” means inactive.
Understanding Displayed Information 111 9 NetW are EncapType Frame type RPRINTER num ber Remote printer number Print serve r name Print server name File serve r name Name of the connect f ile server C.
Appendix 112 9 *1 You can displa y these item names when i nstalling the op tional 1394 i nterface board. *2 ✩ represents a t arget number between 1 and 5. *3 You can displ ay these item names when installin g the optional 802.1 1b interface uni t. *4 ✩ represents a t arget number between 1 and 3.
Message List 113 9 Message List This is a list of messa ges written to the machine 's system log. The system log can be viewed using the “ syslog ” comm and. System Log Info rmation You can use the following methods to view the system log: • telnet : Use the “ syslog ” command.
Appendix 114 9 Change IP add ress from DHCP Server. The IP address changes when DHCP L EASE is renewed. To always assign t he same IP ad- dress, set a st atic I P addre ss to the DH CP serv - er. child process exec error! (p rocess name) T he network service fa iled to start.
Message List 115 9 IEEE 802.11 b <Transmissi on mode> mode Trans mission mode fo r IEEE 80 2.11b (Example: current mod e is infrastructure mod e.) IEEE 802.11b [ infrastruc ture] mode (Exam ple: curr ent mo de is 802.1 1 ad h oc mod e.) IEEE 802.
Appendix 116 9 <Interface>: Subnet overlap. Subnet from Netmask and the IP address you tri ed to set f or <Int erf ace > ov erl ap th e su bne t of another interface. Set Subnet so it does not overlap with another interface. IPP cancel-job: permiss ion denied.
Message List 117 9 permission denied. Job cancellation was dete rmined to be unau- thorized af ter checking the user name and host ad dress (e xcept for ROOT au thoriz ation) . phy release file open failed. A replacement network interface boa r d is re- quired .
Appendix 118 9 Snmp over ipx is ready. Communi cati on ove r I PX via S NMP i s avai lab le. snmpd star t. SN MP se rvice has start ed. star ted. Direct prin t servic e ha s star ted. The print server re c eived error <error number> during a ttempt to log in to the net- wor k.
Message List 119 9 SMTPC: failed to c onnect s mtp server. Failed to connect the SMTP server. This could be b ecau se: • There is no c onnection to the network. • The network configuration is inc orrect, so there is no response from the SMTP se rver.
Appendix 120 9 When Using Windows Terminal Service/Me taFrame Operating Environmen t The follo wing combina tions of oper- ating system and MetaFrame are sup - ported: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Windows NT Server 4.0 Te rminal Serv- er Ed itio n • MetaFrame 1.
When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame 121 9 • When print ing a large num ber of bitmap images or us ing the serv er in a WAN e nviro nment over dial -up lines such a s ISDN, dependi ng on the da ta rate, printing may be disabled or er- ro rs m ay occ ur.
Appendix 122 9 Precautions Please pay attention to the following when usin g the networ k inte rface board. When configuration is n eces- sary, fol low the app ropriate proc e- dures b elow.
Precautions 123 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d ial-up router is c onnected in a network env ironment The settings for the delivery server to b e con nect ed m ust be m ade ap- propriately for the machine with Scan Router V2 Lite /Profe ssiona l, Auto Doc ument Link , or DeskTop - Binder V 2 Lite/Pr ofessi onal.
Appendix 124 9 • Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ Form fe ed ] check box on the [ Printer Settings ] tab in the pri nter properties dialog box . • Under Windows 2000/XP, clear the [ Form fe ed ] check box on the [ NetWare Settings ] tab in the pr inter properties dialog box .
Precautions 125 9 • A n I P a d d r e s s c a n n o t b e u s e d f o r the IPP port name because the IP addres s is used for the SmartDe- vic eM oni tor f or C li ent po rt nam e.
Appendix 126 9 Specifications *1 The 1394 interface boa rd supports onl y TCP/IP. *2 Use the SmartDevic eMonitor for Cl ient port. *3 To use IPP u nder Windows XP o r Windows Server 2 003, use the S tandard IPP por t. Note , in S mar tDevi ceMo nito r for Cl ient ho wever , thi s port does not su ppo rt dige st access authen tication.
127 INDEX A Access Control , 85 access type , 88 AutoNet , 95 , 100 B Bidirectional SCSI print , 30 Broadcast addre ss , 85 C Cha nne l , 31 Com munication M ode , 31 Com munication S peed , 31 commun.
128 GB GB EN USA B683-8640 S SCSI print (SBP-2) , 30 SLP , 91 SmartD eviceMonitor for Cl ient , 124 SMB , 91 SMTP Server , 32 SNMP , 87 , 10 1 specifica tions , 126 SPRINT , 92 SSID Setti ng , 31 subn.
Copyri ght © 2003.
Network Guide GB GB EN USA B683-86 40.
PostScript 3 Operating I nstructions Supplement.
Introduction This manu al describes detailed i nstruction s on the oper ation and notes about the use of this machin e. To ge t maximum versatili ty from thi s mach ine all operators a re reques ted to re ad this m anual c arefully and fo llow the in struction s.
i TABLE OF CONTENTS How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ... 1 1. PostScr ipt 3 Ins talla ble O pti ons ...... ....... .... ..... ...... ..... .... ..... ...... ..... .... .
ii.
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the followin g symbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situatio n which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
2.
3 1. PostScript 3 Installable Options The following options ar e available: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Input Paper Device •L o w e r P a p e r T r a y Setting Up Option s To use installed option s correctly, first set up the printer driver. If the options are not recognized, you cannot use them, even though they are p hysically installed.
PostS cript 3 4 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mac O S You can set up all options us ing the [ Chooser ] di alog box . Limitatio n ❒ Under Mac OS X , this function is no t available.
Printing a Document 5 1 Printing a Document This section de scribes how to print documents from an application. Note ❒ The Mac OS X referred to in this section is Mac OS 10.1. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Source The following ta ble shows where you can selec t this function.
PostS cript 3 6 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Collate Use this function to enable collation. With it, the printer can efficiently print collated sets of multiple-page documents.
Printing a Document 7 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Toner Saving Use this f unction to reduce the am ount of to ner used wh en printing. Limitatio n ❒ When [ Toner Saving ] i s selected, [ Edge Smoothing ] is disabled. Note ❒ This will inc rease the life of th e toner, but the output will appear slightly lighter.
PostS cript 3 8 1 Windows 2000 A A A A From an application, click [ Print ] on the [ File ] menu. The [ Pr int ] di alog box appears. B B B B Click the [ Paper/Quality ] tab. C C C C Click [ Ad vanc ed.. . ] . The [ Adva nced Options ] dialog box appears.
Printing a Document 9 1 Windows NT 4.0 A A A A From an application, click [ Print ] on the [ File ] menu. The [ Pr int ] di alog box appears. B B B B Select the printer, and then click [ Properties ] . C C C C Click the [ Advanced ] tab. D D D D Fro m [ Docum ent Options ] , click [ Print Mode ] to select the function you want to use.
PostS cript 3 10 1 Printer Utility for Mac By using Prin ter Utility for Mac, you can downlo ad fonts, ch ange the printe r name, and so on. Limi tation ❒ If the Maci ntosh and printe r are connected by USB, you can not use Print er Utility for Mac.
Printer Utility for Mac 11 1 Starti ng Printe r Utilit y for Mac This descr ibes how to start Printer Utility for Mac. Mac OS Important ❒ Before starting Printer Utility for M ac, make sure the printer is selected in [ Chooser ] on the Apple menu. A A A A Double-click the Printer Utility for Ma c icon.
PostS cript 3 12 1 Printe r Utility fo r Mac Func tions Printer Utility for Mac fu nctions are described below. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Apple menu (Mac O S), Printer Utilit y for Mac menu (Mac OS X ) • [ About Printer Utility for Mac... ] • [ Choose Printer.
Printer Utility for Mac 13 1 Downloadin g PS Fonts You can do wnload the PS fo nts to t he machine memory. Important ❒ The following downl oad procedure assumes you are a system administra tor. If you a re not, co nsult your sy stem administ rator. ❒ Resetting th e machine deletes the fonts.
PostS cript 3 14 1 Deleting Fonts You can de lete fonts fro m machine memor y. A A A A On the [ File ] menu, click [ Display Printe r's Fonts... ] . The dialog box appea rs. B B B B Select the fonts you wa nt to delete. Limitatio n ❒ You cannot delete fonts that appear in italics.
Printer Utility for Mac 15 1 Printin g Font Samples You can pr int samples of fo nts that have been d ownloaded into the memory. Limi tation ❒ Under Mac OS X, this function is not available. Note ❒ The paper sel ected under [ Page Setup ] is used.
PostS cript 3 16 1 Mac OS X A On the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer... ] . B In th e [ A vailable Network Zones : ] list, click the zone for the Macintosh in use. C In the [ Available Pr inters: ] list, select the printer whose name you changed in step B B B B , and then click [ Choose ] .
Printer Utility for Mac 17 1 Selectin g the Zone You can ch ange the zone th e machine belong s to under Applet alk. Important ❒ Make sure the machine and Macintosh are connected in the Appletalk envi- ronment. A A A A On the [ Utility ] menu, click [ Select Zone.
PostS cript 3 18 1 Launching t he Dialog Console You can create and edit PostScript files for printing and downloading to the ma- chine. Important ❒ Because the “ Launch Di alogue Co nsole ” is recommended for users who have a firm grasp of PostScript, you are a dvised to take extreme care when using it.
19 INDEX C Collate , 6 D Deleting Fo nts , 14 Disp laying Fonts , 13 Disp laying the M achine Status , 17 Download ing Pos tScript Files , 16 Down loadin g PS Fonts , 13 Dupl ex Prin ting , 5 E Edge S.
20 GB GB EN USA B683-8680.
Copyri ght © 2003.
PostS cript 3 Operati ng Instruc tions Supplement GB GB EN USA B683-86 80.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=80 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 3.20 0000 mm Operating Instructions Copy Reference For safety, pleas e read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for f uture reference.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=80 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 3.20 0000 mm In accord ance with IEC 6041 7, this machine uses the followi ng symbols for the main power swit ch: a a a a mean s POWE R ON.
i Safety Information When using this machin e, the following safety p recautions shou ld always be fol- lowed. Safet y During Operat ion In th is m anual , the follow ing imp ortan t symb ols a re use.
ii R CAUT ION: • Protect the ma chine from dam pness or wet weather, such as rain and snow. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machin e. While m oving the machin e, you should take care that the po wer cord will no t be damaged u nder the machine.
iii Posit ions of Labels and Hallmarks for R R R R WARNING and R R R R CAUTION This m achine has labels an d hallmarks for R WARNING, R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, pl ease follow the instructions and handle the mach ine a s i ndica ted .
iv How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machine w ithout following t he in- stru ction s unde r thi s symb ol.
v What You Can Do with This Machine Page36 Page33 Page35 GCFM132N Stel laC1a -EN-CopyF _V4_F M.book P age v Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 200 1 4:03 PM.
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Guid e t o C ompon ent s .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . 1 Opti ons ....... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ....... .... ...... ..
vii Oth er Fu ncti ons .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... .... . 31 User Codes ...... .... ....... ..... ....... ....... .... ....... ..... ...... ....... ..... ....... .... .......
viii 6. Specif icatio ns Mainf rame ..... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... 63 Docu me nt Feed er (AD F) ( Optio n) ..... .... .... .. .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .
1 Guide to Comp onents 1. Expo sure glass cove r Lowe r the exposure glass cover o ver the original placed on th e exposure glass for copyi ng. 2. Document feeder (ADF) (Option) Originals wil l be fed automatic ally. 3. Expo sure glass Po siti on o rig ina ls he re fa ce d own for co py ing .
2 8. On indicator This indicator li ghts up when the opera- tion switch is turned on, and goes off when the switch is turned off . 9. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the po we r on (the On indicator lig hts up). To turn the power of f, press th is switch a gain (th e On indicat or goes off).
3 Opt ions 1. Document feeder (ADF) Originals wil l be fed automatic ally. Other options : • 32MB copier memory unit Increases memory capacity. Stel laC1a -EN-CopyF _V4_F M.
4 Control Panel ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copi er on ly ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax and/or pri nter i nstalled 1. Indicato rs for fax m ode (Fax in- stalled ma chine only) See th e Facsimile Reference ma nual. 2. { { { { Facsi mile } } } } key (Fax in stalled ma- chine only) Press to use fac s imile functions.
5 9. { { { { OK } } } } key 10. { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key Pre ss to c ha nge the def au lt se tting s a nd conditions to meet your requi rements. See p.51 “ U ser Tool s (C op ier Fe at ure s) ” . 11. { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key While entering numbers, press to cancel a number you have entered .
6 Panel D ispl ay The panel displ ay shows the status of the machine, error messages, and function men us. Importa nt ❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30N (about 3kgf) or more to the panel display. Otherwise, the displa y might be damaged.
7 1. Basics Turning On the Po wer To turn the ma chin e on , pres s the operat ion sw itch. Note ❒ This mac hin e auto mati call y ente rs En ergy Saver mo de or tu rns it self off if you do not u se the machi ne for a while. See “ 6. Auto Off Ti mer ” in the S ystem Se t- tings manual.
Basics 8 1 Star ting the Machine A A A A Press the operation switch to make the O n indicator go on. The display panel wi ll come on. Note ❒ If the power is not turned on w hen the operation switch is pressed , check if th e ma in p owe r swi tch is on .
Changi ng Modes 9 1 Changing Mo des You can use t his machine not only as a copi er, but optio nally as a fax machine or a printer as well. Press th e { { { { Copy } } } } key to use copy functions, or pr ess the { { { { Fac- simi le } } } } key to use facsimile functions.
Basics 10 1 Orig inals Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version Non-recommen ded originals for the document feeder (ADF) Placing the following originals in the d ocument fee der (ADF) might cause paper misfee ds or damage to the o riginals.
Orig inals 11 1 Original Sizes and Scanning Area/ Missi ng Image Area ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Exposure glass ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document feeder (ADF) Limitati on ❒ Even if you correc tly plac e orig inals in th e document feede r (ADF) or on t he exposure glass, margins (about 4mm, 0.
Basics 12 1 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Types The fo llowin g limi tati ons a pply to each tr ay: *1 Paper wei ght: 80 g/m 2 , 20 l b Importa nt ❒ Use of damp or curled pap er may cause a misfeed. If a misfeed occurs, tr y turning over the paper stack in the paper tray.
Copy Pape r 13 1 Note ❒ Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray. ❒ When pr intin g on envelop es, note the follo wing: • Load th e envelope w ith the copy side face d own o n the byp ass tray. • Check th at envelope flap is securely folded up.
Basics 14 1 ❒ Do not use en velopes in the followi ng conditions. • damp • excessi vely cu rled o r tw isted • stuck together • damaged in any way • with stam ps attached • with windows,.
Toner 15 1 Toner Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ If you use t oner other t han that recom mended ty pe, a fault might occur.
Basics 16 1 Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 16 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
17 2. Copying Basi c Proce dure A A A A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode . Note ❒ If not, press the { { { { Copy } } } } key. B B B B If the machine is set for User Cod e, ent er the code w ith the number keys, and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 18 2 - - - - Auto Off The mac hine tur ns itse lf o ff au tomat - ically afte r your job is finished, afte r a certai n peri od of tim e. This fu nction is calle d “ Auto Off ” .
Placin g Originals 19 2 Placing Or iginals Limitati on ❒ Place ori ginals after correction f lu- id and in k has com pletely dried. Not taking this precaution could mark the exposur e glass a n d caus e mar ks to be cop ied. Note ❒ Basic ally, the orig inals sho uld be aligned to the rear left corner.
Copying 20 2 Loadi ng Originals in th e Document Feeder (ADF) Note ❒ The orig inal might become d irty if it is writ ten w ith a pen cil or simi lar tool s. ❒ Do not place any foreign object s on the d ocument feeder (ADF ) or cov- er it with your hand.
Placin g Originals 21 2 C C C C Make sure tha t "Standard Size" is selec ted, and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . Note ❒ If not, press the 0 or 1 key to sele ct it . D D D D Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to se lect original size, and th en press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 22 2 C C C C Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select "3. Original Size", and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You c an al so enter this m ode by pressing the { { { { R/# } } } } key. D D D D Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to se lect "Cust om Siz e", and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Basic Fu nctions 23 2 Basi c Functi ons Note ❒ You can sel ect functions to be acti - vated when Syst em Re set is turned on, when Energy Saver is turned off, or after t he machin e is pow- ered o n. See p .54 “ Settings You Can Change with the User Tools ” .
Copying 24 2 Sele cting Copy Paper You c an manual ly selec t the pap er tray for the paper size you wi sh to use. A A A A Select the pape r tray or by pass tray by pressi ng the { { { { Select Paper Tray } } } } key.
Sort 25 2 Sor t The o ptional 3 2MB copier m emory unit is re quired to use th is function. Th e mach ine can scan y our o riginals into m emory and a utomatic ally sort the co pies . Limitati on ❒ The maxi mum paper lengt h for the sort fu nction i s 356 mm.
Copying 26 2 D D D D Enter the number of copy sets with t he num ber ke ys. Note ❒ The maxim um number of sets is 99. You can change the default numb er wi th “ 1. M ax. Copy Q'ty ” i n th e co pier feat ur es. S ee p.5 4 “ Settings You Can Change with the User Tools ” .
Copyi ng from the Bypass Tr ay 27 2 Copying fr om the Bypass Tray Use th e byp ass tray to copy onto O HP transparencies, adhesive l abels, trans- lucen t paper , post cards, envelop es, and copy paper that cann ot be set in the pa per tra y.
Copying 28 2 Referen ce For d etails about how to set the copy paper, see p.28 “ When copying onto OHP transparen - cies ” , p.29 “ When copyi ng onto stand ard si ze pap er ” , p.2 9 “ When cop ying onto custom size co py paper ” or p. 30 “ When copying onto envelopes ” .
Copyi ng from the Bypass Tr ay 29 2 When copying onto standa rd size pa per Importa nt ❒ You should specify the size of pa- per to avo id paper mis feeds. Note ❒ Th e defa ul t copy pa per siz e fo r the pape r tr ay and the bypass tr ay is A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { R/# } } } } key.
Copying 30 2 D D D D Enter the vertical size of th e paper with the numb er keys, and then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To c hange the numb er en tered, press the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key, and then enter the new number.
Ot her Fun cti ons 31 2 Other Functions User Codes When user c odes are set, operators mu st enter the ir user codes befor e the machine can be operated.
Copying 32 2 Auto Start If you press the { { { { Sta rt } } } } key during the warm-u p period , the { { { { Sta rt } } } } key will blink and your copies will be mad e as soon as w arm-up finishes. A A A A Make any adjustments to copy settings during the warm-u p peri- od.
Prese t Reduce/Enlar ge 33 2 Preset Reduce/Enl arge You c an select a preset ra tio for c opy- ing. Note ❒ You can select one of 5 preset ratios (2 enlargement ratios, 3 reduction rati os). ❒ You can change th e preset ratios to other ra tios you frequent ly use.
Copying 34 2 D D D D Place your originals, and then pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key. Note ❒ When the co py paper size and the original size differ, set the orig inal size. S ee p.20 “ Pl acing Stand ard Size Origin als ” Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.
Zoom 35 2 Zoom You can ch ange the re product ion ra- tio in 1% step s. Note ❒ You can change the rep roduction rati o from 50 – 200%. ❒ You can sel ect a ratio r egardless of the size of an original o r copy pa- per. Wi th some ra tios, par ts of the image mi ght no t be cop ied or mar - gins will appear on copies.
Copying 36 2 Combi ne Use thi s featu re to c ombine two or ig- inal images onto one page. Limitati on ❒ The ma chine canno t copy or igina ls dif ferent in size and direc tion. ❒ You cannot use the bypass tray with this fu nctio n. Note ❒ A5, 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " K copy pap er can- not be combined.
Combine 37 2 C C C C Sel ect “” with the 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You can specify the o rientation of or iginals.
Copying 38 2 Combinatio n Chart The combination char t given below sho ws which mod es can be used t ogether. When you read the chart, please refer t o the follow ing table. The follow in g shows the com bin ation s of func tion s. ✩ means that these modes can be used tog ether.
39 3. Troubleshooting Machi ne Operati on Proble ms General Display Machi ne's Condit ion Problem/C ause Act ion The mach ine instr ucts you to wait . Th e mac hin e is w arm ing u p. Wa it for the ma chin e to wa rm- up. Refere nce You can use Auto Start mode d uring t he warm-up period.
Troubl eshootin g 40 3 Cann ot Ma ke Cl ear Copi es Pro blem C aus e A cti on Copies appe ar dirty. Th e image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. See p.23 “ Adjusting Copy Image Dens ity ” . The r everse side of an origi nal image is copied .
Cannot Make Desi red Copi es 41 3 Cannot Make Desire d Copies Combine Pro blem C aus e A cti on Misfee ds occur freq uently. C opy paper size setting is not corre ct. Set the pr oper pap er size. Se e p.47 “ Changing the Pape r Size ” or p.27 “ Copying from the Bypass Tray ” .
Troubl eshootin g 42 3 h h h h Loading Paper Note ❒ If you want to change the pap er size, see p.47 “ Changing the Paper Size ” . Refere nce Regarding paper types and size s that can be used, se e p.12 “ Copy Paper ” . A A A A Make sure that the paper tray is not being us ed.
h Changing the Tone r Cartri dge 43 3 h h h h Changing the Toner Car tridge Whe n h is disp laye d, it is time to s upply tone r. R WARNING: R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ If you use t oner other than that recom mended, a fault might o ccur. ❒ When adding to ner, do not turn off the pow er switch.
Troubl eshootin g 44 3 • Hold the ne w toner car tridge hor izontally, and then shake it 5 or 6 ti mes. • Remove th e seal. • Inse rt the ne w toner c artridg e. • Push the n ew tone r cartri dge in u ntil it clic ks. • Close the front cover of the machine.
h Cleari ng Misfeeds 45 3 h h h h Clearing Misfee ds R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ When clearing mi sfeeds, do no t turn off the pow er switch. If you d o, your copy setting s are cleared. ❒ T o p r e v e n t m i s f e e d s , d o n o t l e a v e a n y t o r n s c r a p s o f p a p e r w i t h i n t h e m a - chi ne.
Troubl eshootin g 46 3 Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 46 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
Changi ng the Paper Si ze 47 3 Changing the Paper Size Importa nt ❒ Select t he paper size with the u ser tools, or misfeeds might occur. Refere nce For paper sizes, weight, and capac- ity tha t can be loa ded in th e tray, see p.12 “ Copy Pape r ” .
Troubl eshootin g 48 3 F F F F Square the pape r and loa d it in the tra y. Import ant ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark . G G G G Adjus t the side a nd ba ck fen ces to the ne w paper siz e.
Changi ng the Paper Si ze 49 3 E E E E If you ha ve sel ected "3 . Bypa ss" on step D D D D , select "Standard Si ze" or "Custom Size", and then p ress the { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Sel ect t he desi red pa per size.
Troubl eshootin g 50 3 Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 50 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
51 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Acces sing the Us er Tools (Co pier Features) This sect ion is for the key operat ors in charg e of thi s machi ne. Th e user tools allow you to change or set the m a- chin e's defaul t se ttings. Prep arat io n Always exi t the user tools w hen you have fi n ished.
User Tools (Co pier Fea tures) 52 4 Exit ing the User Tools A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. Note ❒ You can exit th e User To ols mode by pressing the { { { { Cancel } } } } key. ❒ If you w ant to r eturn to the pr e- vious mode, press the { { { { User Tools/Count er } } } } key.
User Tools Me nu (Copi er Featu res) 53 4 Use r Tools Menu (Copie r Features) Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 53 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
User Tools (Co pier Fea tures) 54 4 Sett ings Yo u Ca n Change with t he Us er To ols Refere nce For d etail s abou t how to access th e user tool s, see p.51 “ Accessing th e User Tools (Cop ier Fea tures ) ” . Copier Featu res Menu Des criptio n 1.
Setting s You Can Change with t he User Tools 55 4 3. Set Ratio Select which Re duce, En large or Inp ut Ratio is shown on the panel display with p riority when the { { { { Reduce/Enla rge } } } } key is presse d.
User Tools (Co pier Fea tures) 56 4 5. Clear all User Cod es (5. Clr All User Codes) You c an cl ear a ll user c ode s. Note ❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to that made under the new user c ode. ❒ The number of c opies made unde r the deleted code i s also de- let ed.
57 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100%, before you unplug the pow- er cor d. ❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax. Refere nce For details, see the Facsimile Reference manual.
Remarks 58 5 Where to Put Y our Machine Machi ne E nviro nmen t Your mac hine's location sho uld be carefully chosen because environment al con- diti ons g reat ly af fec t its pe rfor manc e. Optimum environ mental condition s R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: • Temperatur e: 10 – 32 ° C (50 – 89.
Where to Put Your Machine 59 5 Powe r Connectio n R WARNING: R WARNING: R CAUT ION: • When th e mai n switch is in the S tand-by p ositi on, the opti onal an ti-cond en- sation heaters are on. In case of eme rgency, unplug the machi ne's power cor d.
Remarks 60 5 Access to Mach ine Place the machine near the powe r source, providing clearance as shown. 1. Re ar: mo re t han 1c m (0.4" ) 2. Right: more than 1cm (0.
Main taini ng Y our Ma chine 61 5 Maintain ing Your Machine If the exposure glass, exposure g lass cover or do cument feeder (AD F) white sheet is dirty , clean t hem i f you find them dirty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machin e Wipe the machine with a soft, damp clot h.
Remarks 62 5 Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 62 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
63 6. Specifications Mainframe ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Conf igu rat ion: Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photosensitiv ity t ype: OPC drum ( Φ 30) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original s canning: One-dimensional solid scanning s.
Specific ations 64 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Co py pap er we igh t: • Paper tray (St andard size): 60 – 90g/m 2 (16 – 24 lb .) • Bypass tray: 60 – 1 57g/m 2 (16 – 42 lb.) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Non-repr oductio n area: • Leading edge: 3 ± 2mm, 0. 14" ± 0.
Ma inf ra me 65 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Dime nsions ( W × × × × D × × × × H up to exposure glass): 468 × 45 0 × 371mm (18.43 × 17. 72 × 14.61 inch) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Noise Emissi on *1 : • Sound power level • Sound p ressure level *2 *1 The ab ove me asureme nts ma de in acco rdanc e with ISO 777 9 are a ctual val ue.
Specific ations 66 6 Docu ment Feeder (AD F) (Option) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode : • ADF mode ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig inal si ze: • A4 L – A5 KL • 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig ina l wei ght: • 1- sided or igi nals: 52 – 105g/m 2 (14 – 28 lb.
32MB Copi er Memory Unit (Option ) 67 6 32MB Co pier Memory Unit (Optio n) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory capacity: 32MB ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Additional fu nctions: Incr eased memo ry capa city ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Number of originals that can be stored: abo ut 99 pages ITU-T No.
68 INDEX 32MB Copier Me mory Unit , 3 , 67 A Access to Machine , 60 Adj us ting C opy Im age De ns ity , 23 Adjust Orig inal Mode , 54 Auto Off , 18 Auto Start , 32 B Basic Functio ns , 23 Bypas s Pap.
69 T Toner , 15 U User C odes , 31 User Tool s , 51 V Ventil ation hol e , 1 Z Zoom , 35 Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 69 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
70 MEMO Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 70 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
71 MEMO Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 71 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
72 UE USA B 04 5 MEMO Stel laC1a -EN-Cop yF_V4_F M.book Page 72 Wednes day, S eptem ber 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=20 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Operating Instructio ns System Settings For safety, ple ase read this manual carefully before you use this produc t and keep it handy for future referenc e.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=20 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Note to users i.
i ENER GY S TAR Progr am •L o w P o w e r m o d e This product automatic ally lowers its power consum ption 15 minutes after the last copy or pri nt job has finished. Fax reception and printing is st ill pos- sible in L ow Power mo de, but if you wish to make cop ies press th e operatio n switch f irst.
ii Specification Recycled Paper In acco rdance with the ENERG Y STA R Program , we recom mend use of recycl ed paper wh ich is environmen tally friendly.
iii How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machine w ithout following t he in- stru ction s unde r thi s symb ol.
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS Manu als for Thi s M achi ne .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... ... 1 Add iti onal Func tion s P rovi ded by I nter nal Op tions . .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. . 2 Copy M ode .
1 Manuals f or This Machine Thi s is a mu lti- fun ction al ma ch ine comb inin g co pier , pri nte r and fax f uncti ons. A sepa rate manual is provided for each function. Please co nsult the manual t hat suits your needs. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System Settings Provides an ov erview of the machine.
2 Additional Functio ns Provi ded by Internal Opt ions You can expand the capabili ties of this machine to include fax functions and printer functions.
3 1. Modes Changing Mo des Pre ss th e { { { { Copy } } } } , { { { { Facsimil e } } } } or { { { { Printer } } } } key to switch to copy, f ax or printer mode respe ct ively . Limitati on ❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the fol lowing cases: • When scanning in a fax message for transmission.
Modes 4 1 Mult i-acc ess You can carry out another job using a different function while th e current job is being performe d. This allows y ou to handle your jobs efficientl y regardless of h ow the m achine is being used. For example: • While making co pies, the machine can send a fax message that has been stored in memo ry.
Multi-a ccess 5 1 ✩ … means tha t these functions can be used togeth er. ❍ … means that you can interrupt the current job with function keys to pro ceed to a subsequent job. → … means th at a nothe r job w ill au tomati cal ly start after t he cur rent jo b is f in- ished.
Modes 6 1 Copy Mode Changin g to Copy Mode You can alwa ys make a cop y when the machi ne is not printing or scan- ning fax data. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Copy } } } } key. The copy display a ppears on the panel display. Referen ce For details, see the Copy Refer- ence m anua l.
Fac simile Mod e 7 1 Facsimi le Mode Changin g to Facsimile Mode You ca n alway s use th e machin e for faxin g when you are not us ing the scanner funct ion. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Facsim ile } } } } key. The fax display ap pears o n th e panel display.
Modes 8 1 Printer Mo de Changin g to Printer Mode Whenever you pri nt from applica- tions, you do not have to switch to Printer mod e . Refere nce For details, se e the Printer Refe r- ence m anual. Pri nt ing The machine can rec eive a print data while another feature is running.
9 2. User Tools (System Settings) Keys for Us er Tools (Sy stem Settings ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the cop ier feature only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the pr inter and/or fax feature 1. { { { { Cancel } } } } key Press to return to the previous m enu.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 10 2 7. { { { { Clear Mode s } } } } key Press to clear th e previously entered c opy job settings. 8. { { { { Facsimile } } } } key (Fax installed ma - chine only) Press to use fac s imile functions. 9. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to use copy functions.
Acces sing the User Tool s (System Set tings) 11 2 Acces sing the U ser Tools (System Se ttings) This sect ion is for the key operat ors in charge of this machine. You can change or set the machine's def ault setti ngs. Prep arat io n After using the u ser t ools, b e sure to r eturn to Co py mo de.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 12 2 C C C C Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key until your desi red menu is di splay ed, an d then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ 1 : Press to go to the next menu. ❒ 0 : Press to go back to the previ- ous m enu.
User Tool s Menu (System Set tings) 13 2 User T ools Menu (Sys tem Se ttings) Stel laC1a -EN-SysF _V4_FM.b ook Pa ge 13 Wednesda y, Sep tember 12, 20 01 4:1 6 PM.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 14 2 Sett ings Yo u Ca n Change with t he Us er To ols Refere nce For details abo ut how to access the user tools , see p.
Setting s You Can Change with t he User Tools 15 2 5. Ene rgy Saver Leve l You can select the E nergy Saver l evel. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 1 • Power Con sumptio n: Reduced by about 5% compared to standby mode. • Warm-Up Time: about 5 seconds ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 2 • Power Con sumptio n: Reduced by about 40% compared to standby mode.
16 UE USA B 04 5 INDEX A AOF(Keep It On.) , 15 Auto Off Timer , 15 C Clea r Modes key , 10 Clea r/Stop key , 9 Contr ast , 15 Copy Count Display , 14 Copy Mode , 2 , 6 Cur sor keys , 9 E Energy Saver .
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=84 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 3.36 0000 mm Operating Instructions Copy Refere nce Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=84 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 3.36 0000 mm In accor dance with IEC 6041 7, this machine uses the follow ing symbols for t he main power swit ch: a a a a means POWER ON.
i Safety Information When using your equipment, the follow ing safety precautions should always be followed. Safet y During Operat ion In th is m anual , the follow ing imp ortan t symb ols a re used .
ii R CAUT ION: • Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on. • Unplug the power cord from the wal l outlet before you move the equip ment. While moving the equipm ent, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment.
iii Positi ons of Label s and Hallm arks for R R R R WARN ING a nd R R R R CA UTION This m achine has labels an d hallmarks for R WARNING, R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, pl ease follow the instructions and handle the mach ine a s i ndica ted .
iv How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machine w ithout following t he in- stru ction s unde r thi s symb ol.
v Machi ne Ty pes This mac hine has two models. Typ e 2 machine is instal led with the fax uni t as a standard. Type 1 Type 2 Fax unit Option Stand ard Printer un it Option Option Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM.
vi What You Can Do with This Machine Stel laC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age vi We dnesda y, Jul y 4, 20 01 11 :23 AM.
vii TABLE OF CONTENTS Guid e t o C ompon ent s .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... . 1 Opti ons ....... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ....... .... ...... .
viii Oth er Fu ncti ons .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... .... . 31 User Codes ...... .... ....... ..... ....... ....... .... ....... ..... ...... ....... ..... ....... .... ......
ix 6. Specif icatio ns Mainf rame ..... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... 65 Docu me nt Feed er (AD F) ( Optio n for Ty pe 1) .. .... .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... ..
x Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age x W ednesda y, July 4, 2001 11:23 AM.
1 Guide to Comp onents 1. Expo sure glass cove r Lowe r the exposure glass cover o ver the original placed on th e exposure glass for copyi ng. 2. Document feeder (ADF) (Option for Type 1) Originals wil l be fed automatic ally. 3. Expo sure glass Po siti on o rig ina ls he re fa ce d own for co py ing .
2 8. On indicator This indicator li ghts up when the opera- tion switch is turned on, and goes off when the switch is turned off . 9. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the po we r on (the On indicator lig hts up). To turn the power of f, press th is switch a gain (th e On indicat or goes off).
3 Opt ions 1. Document feeder (ADF) (Option for Type 1) Originals wil l be fed automatic ally. 2. Pape r tr ay un it Holds 500 sheets of pap er. Other options : • 32MB copier memory unit Increases memory capacity.
4 Control Panel ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copi er on ly ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax and/or pri nter i nstalled 1. Indicato rs for fax m ode (Fax in- stalled ma chine only) See th e Facsimile Reference ma nual. 2. { { { { Facsi mile } } } } key (Fax in stalled ma- chine only) Press to use fac s imile functions.
5 11. { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key While entering numbers, press to cancel a number you have entered . While copy- ing, press to stop copying. 12. { { { { Clear Mo des } } } } key Press to clear th e previously entered c opy job settings.
6 Panel D ispl ay The panel displ ay shows the status of the machine, error messages, and function men us. Importa nt ❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30N (about 3kgf) or more to the panel display. Otherwise, the displa y might be damaged.
7 1. Basics Turning On the Po wer To turn the ma chin e on , pres s the operat ion sw itch. Note ❒ This mac hin e auto mati call y ente rs En ergy Saver mo de or tu rns it self off if you do not u se the machi ne for a while. See “ 6. Auto Off Ti mer ” in the S ystem Se t- tings manual.
Basics 8 1 Star ting the Machine A A A A Press the operation switch to make the O n indicator go on. The display panel wi ll come on. Note ❒ If the power is not turned on w hen the operation switch is pressed , check if th e ma in p owe r swi tch is on .
Changi ng Modes 9 1 Changing Mo des You can use t his machine not only as a copi er, but optio nally as a fax machine or a printe r as well . (Type 2 machin e is insta lled with t he fax functio n as the stan- dard.) Press the { { { { Copy } } } } key to use copy functions, or press the { { { { Facsimile } } } } key to us e fac sim ile func tion s.
Basics 10 1 Orig inals Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version Non-recommen ded originals for the document feeder (ADF) Placing the following originals in the d ocument fee der (ADF) might cause paper misfee ds or damage to the o riginals.
Orig inals 11 1 Original Sizes and Scanning Area/ Missi ng Image Area ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Exposure glass ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document feeder (ADF) Limitati on ❒ Even if you correc tly plac e orig inals in th e document feede r (ADF) or on t he exposure glass, margins (about 4mm, 0.
Basics 12 1 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Types The fo llowin g limi tati ons a pply to each tr ay: *1 Paper wei ght: 80 g/m 2 , 20 l b *2 Place one sheet at a time.
Copy Pape r 13 1 Importa nt ❒ Use of damp or curled pap er may cause a misfeed. If a misfeed occurs, tr y turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement, chang e to copy paper with le ss curl. Note ❒ Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray.
Basics 14 1 Note ❒ Do not use any of the fol lowing ki nds of paper o r a mi sfeed might occur. • Bent, folded, or cr eased pa per • Damp paper • Tor n paper • Slip pery pape r • Perforat .
Toner 15 1 Toner Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ If you use t oner other t han that recom mended ty pe, a fault might occur.
Basics 16 1 Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 16 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
17 2. Copying Basi c Proce dure A A A A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode . Note ❒ If not, press the { { { { Copy } } } } key. B B B B If the machine is set for User Cod e, ent er the code w ith the number keys, and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 18 2 - - - - Auto Off The mac hine tur ns itse lf o ff au tomat - ically afte r your job is finished, afte r a certai n peri od of tim e. This fu nction is calle d “ Auto Off ” .
Placin g Originals 19 2 Placing Or iginals Limitati on ❒ Place ori ginals after correction f lu- id and in k has com pletely dried. Not taking this precaution could mark the exposur e glass a n d caus e mar ks to be cop ied. Note ❒ Basic ally, the orig inals sho uld be aligned to the rear left corner.
Copying 20 2 Loadi ng Originals in th e Document Feeder (ADF) Note ❒ The orig inal might become d irty if it is writ ten w ith a pen cil or simi lar tool s. ❒ Do not place any foreign object s on the d ocument feeder (ADF ) or cov- er it with your hand.
Placin g Originals 21 2 C C C C Make sure tha t "Standard Size" is selec ted, and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . Note ❒ If not, press the 0 or 1 key to sele ct it . D D D D Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to se lect original size, and th en press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 22 2 C C C C Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select "3. Original Size", and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You c an al so enter this m ode by pressing the { { { { R/# } } } } key. D D D D Pre ss t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to se lect "Cust om Siz e", and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Basic Fu nctions 23 2 Basi c Functi ons Note ❒ You can sel ect functions to be acti - vated when Syst em Re set is turned on, when Energy Saver is turned off, or after t he machin e is pow- ered o n. See p .56 “ Settings You Can Change with the User Tools ” .
Copying 24 2 Sele cting Copy Paper You c an manual ly selec t the pap er tray for the paper size you wi sh to use. A A A A Select the pape r tray or by pass tray by pressi ng the { { { { Select Paper Tray } } } } key.
Sort 25 2 Sor t The o ptional 3 2MB copier m emory unit is re quired to use th is function. Th e mach ine can scan y our o riginals into m emory and a utomatic ally sort the co pies . Limitati on ❒ The maxi mum paper lengt h for the sort fu nction i s 356 mm.
Copying 26 2 D D D D Enter the number of copy sets with t he num ber ke ys. Note ❒ The maxim um number of sets is 99. You can change the default numb er wi th “ 1. M ax. Copy Q'ty ” i n th e co pier feat ur es. S ee p.5 6 “ Settings You Can Change with the User Tools ” .
Copyi ng from the Bypass Tr ay 27 2 Copying fr om the Bypass Tray Use th e byp ass tray to copy onto O HP transparencies, adhesive l abels, trans- lucen t paper , post cards, envelop es, and copy paper that cann ot be set in the pa per tra y.
Copying 28 2 Note ❒ Set the d irectio n of the co py pa - per to L . ❒ Swing out the exten der to sup- port pap er s izes la rger than A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L . ❒ Fan paper to get air between the sheets and avoid a multi-sheet feed. Referen ce For d etails about how to set the copy paper, see p.
Copyi ng from the Bypass Tr ay 29 2 F F F F Gently insert the OHP transpar- encies face down and ad just the pape r gui de. Import ant ❒ The side of OHP transparencies t h a t i s c o p i e d i s f i x e d . B e f o r e you place the OHP transparen- cies in t he bypass tr ay, chec k the cutting position of the OHP transparencies.
Copying 30 2 C C C C Enter the horizontal size of the pape r wi th the numbe r keys , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To c hange the numb er en tered, press the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key, and then enter the new number.
Ot her Fun cti ons 31 2 Other Functions User Codes When user c odes are set, operators mu st enter the ir user codes befor e the machine can be operated.
Copying 32 2 Preset Reduce/Enl arge You c an select a preset ra tio for c opy- ing. Note ❒ You can select one of 5 preset ratios (2 enlargement ratios, 3 reduction rati os). ❒ You can change th e preset ratios to other ra tios you frequent ly use.
Prese t Reduce/Enlar ge 33 2 D D D D Place your originals, and then pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key. Note ❒ When the co py paper size and the original size differ, set the orig inal size. S ee p.20 “ Pl acing Stand ard Size Origin als ” Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .
Copying 34 2 Zoom You can ch ange the re product ion ra- tio in 1% step s. Note ❒ You can change the rep roduction rati o from 50 – 200%. ❒ You can sel ect a ratio r egardless of the size of an original o r copy pa- per. Wi th some ra tios, par ts of the image mi ght no t be cop ied or mar - gins will appear on copies.
Combine 35 2 Combi ne Use thi s featu re to c ombine two or ig- inal images onto one page. Limitati on ❒ The ma chine canno t copy or igina ls dif ferent in size and direc tion. Note ❒ A5, 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " K copy pap er can- not be combined.
Copying 36 2 C C C C Sel ect “” with the 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You can specify the o rientation of or iginals.
Combi nation Chart 37 2 Combinatio n Chart The combination char t given below sho ws which mod es can be used t ogether. When you read the chart, please refer t o the follow ing table. The follow in g shows the com bin ation s of func tion s. ✩ means that these modes can be used toge ther.
Copying 38 2 Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 38 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
39 3. Troubleshooting Machi ne Operati on Proble ms General Display Machi ne's Condit ion Problem/C ause Act ion The mach ine instr ucts you to wait . Th e mac hin e is w arm ing u p. Wa it for the ma chin e to wa rm- up. Refere nce You can use Auto Start mode d uring t he warm-up period.
Troubl eshootin g 40 3 Cann ot Ma ke Cl ear Copi es Pro blem C aus e A cti on Copies appe ar dirty. Th e image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. See p.23 “ Adjusting Copy Image Dens ity ” . The r everse side of an origi nal image is copied .
Cannot Make Desi red Copi es 41 3 Cannot Make Desire d Copies Combine Pro blem C aus e A cti on Misfee ds occur freq uently. C opy paper size setting is not corre ct. Set the pr oper pap er size. Se e p.48 “ Changing the Pape r Size ” or p.27 “ Copying from the Bypass Tray ” .
Troubl eshootin g 42 3 h h h h Loading Paper Note ❒ If you want to change the pap er size, see p.48 “ Changing the Paper Size ” . Refere nce Regarding paper types and size s that can be used, se e p.12 “ Copy Paper ” . A A A A Make sure that the paper tray is not being us ed.
h Loadi ng Paper 43 3 Note ❒ Shuffle the paper befo re loading it i n the tr ay. ❒ If th e paper i s curl ed, load the pape r up side down. E E E E Readjust th e back fen ce and side fence s.
Troubl eshootin g 44 3 h h h h Changing the Toner Car tridge Whe n h is disp laye d, it is time to s upply tone r. R WARNING: R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ If you use t oner other than that recom mended, a fault might o ccur. ❒ When adding to ner, do not turn off the pow er switch.
h Changing the Tone r Cartri dge 45 3 • Press the Toner C artridg e backwar d to raise its head, and then gen tly pull out the bottle . • Hold the new bottle hori zontally, and then shake it 5 or 6 tim es. Note ❒ Do not remove the black cap when sha king .
Troubl eshootin g 46 3 h h h h Clearing Misfee ds R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ When clearing mi sfeeds, do no t turn off the pow er switch. If you d o, your copy setting s are cleared. ❒ T o p r e v e n t m i s f e e d s , d o n o t l e a v e a n y t o r n s c r a p s o f p a p e r w i t h i n t h e m a - chi ne.
h Cleari ng Misfeeds 47 3 Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 47 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
Troubl eshootin g 48 3 Changing the Paper Size Importa nt ❒ Select t he paper size with the u ser tools, or misfeeds might occur. Refere nce For paper sizes, weight, and capac- ity that can be loaded in each t ray, see p.12 “ Copy Pape r ” . Changin g the Paper Siz e in the Paper Tr ay A A A A Make sure that the paper tray is not being us ed.
Changi ng the Paper Si ze 49 3 F F F F Square the pape r and loa d it in the tra y. Import ant ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark . G G G G Adjus t the side a nd ba ck fen ces to the ne w paper siz e.
Troubl eshootin g 50 3 D D D D While pressing th e release lever, adjust the side fe nces. E E E E Push th e metal pla te down, and then square the pape r and load it in the tray. Import ant ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark . ❒ Load pa per so that the pa per touche s th e right side of the tray, or misfeed s might occur.
Changi ng the Paper Si ze 51 3 Sele cting the Paper Siz e with the User Tools A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Pr ess t he 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to display "2.Syste m Settings", and then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Troubl eshootin g 52 3 Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 52 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
53 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Acces sing the Us er Tools (Co pier Features) This sect ion is for the key operat ors in charg e of thi s machi ne. Th e user tools allow you to change or set the m a- chin e's defaul t se ttings. Prep arat io n Always exi t the user tools w hen you have fi n ished.
User Tools (Co pier Fea tures) 54 4 Exit ing the User Tools A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User Too ls/Counter } } } } key. Note ❒ You can exit th e User To ols mode by pressing the { { { { Cancel } } } } key. ❒ If you w ant to r eturn to the pr e- vi ous m ode (c opy or fac simil e), press the { { { { User T ools/C ounter } } } } key.
User Tools Me nu (Copi er Featu res) 55 4 Use r Tools Menu (Copie r Features) Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 55 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
User Tools (Co pier Fea tures) 56 4 Sett ings Yo u Ca n Change with t he Us er To ols Refere nce For d etail s abou t how to access th e user tool s, see p.53 “ Accessing th e User Tools (Cop ier Fea tures ) ” . Copier Featu res Menu Des criptio n 1.
Setting s You Can Change with t he User Tools 57 4 3. Set Ratio Select which Re duce, En large or Inp ut Ratio is shown on the panel display with p riority when the { { { { Reduce/Enla rge } } } } key is presse d.
User Tools (Co pier Fea tures) 58 4 5. Clear all User Cod es (5. Clr All User Codes) You c an cl ear a ll user c ode s. Note ❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to that made under the new user c ode. ❒ The number of c opies made unde r the deleted code i s also de- let ed.
59 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUT ION: Importa nt ❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100%, before you unplug the pow- er cor d. ❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax. Refere nce For details, see the Facsimile Reference manual.
Remarks 60 5 Where to Put Y our Machine Machi ne E nviro nmen t Your mac hine's location sho uld be carefully chosen because environment al con- diti ons g reat ly af fec t its pe rfor manc e. Optimum environ mental condition s R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: R CAUT ION: • Temperatur e: 10 – 32 ° C (50 – 89.
Where to Put Your Machine 61 5 Powe r Connectio n R WARNING: R WARNING: R CAUT ION: • When th e mai n switch is in the S tand-by p ositi on, the opti onal an ti-cond en- sation heaters are on. In case of eme rgency, unplug the machi ne's power cor d.
Remarks 62 5 Access to Mach ine Place the machine near the powe r source, providing clearance as shown. 1. Re ar: mo re t han 1c m (0.4" ) 2. Right: more than 1cm (0.
Main taini ng Y our Ma chine 63 5 Maintain ing Your Machine If the exposure glass, exposure g lass cover or do cument feeder (AD F) white sheet is dirty , clean t hem i f you find them dirty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machin e Wipe the machine with a soft, damp clot h.
Remarks 64 5 Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 64 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
65 6. Specifications Mainframe ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Conf igu rat ion: Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photosensitiv ity t ype: OPC drum ( Φ 30) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original s canning: One-dimensional solid scanning s.
Specific ations 66 6 • Bypas s tray (custo m siz e): Vertical : 90 – 216mm, 3.5" – 8.5" Horizont al: 140 – 356mm, 5 .5" – 14" • Paper t ray unit: A 4 L , 8 1 / 2 ".
Ma inf ra me 67 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power consumpt ion: *1 Mainframe with the opti onal document feeder (ADF), paper tray unit. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Dime nsions ( W × × × × D × × × × H up to exposure glass): • Type 1 : 468 × 450 × 371m m (18.43 × 17.
Specific ations 68 6 Document Feeder (ADF) (Option for Type 1) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode : • ADF mode ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig inal si ze: • A4 L – A5 KL • 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig ina l wei ght: • 1- sided or igi nals: 52 – 105g/m 2 (14 – 28 lb.
Paper Tr ay Unit (Option ) 69 6 Paper Tray U nit (O ption) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Co py pap er we igh t: 60 – 90g/m 2 (16 – 24 lb.) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Available paper size: A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14 ".
Specific ations 70 6 32MB Co pier Memory Unit (Optio n) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory capacity: 32MB ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Additional fu nctions: Incr eased memo ry capa city ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Number of originals that can be stored: abo ut 99 pages ITU-T No.4 chart Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .
71 INDEX 32MB Copier Me mory Unit , 3 , 70 A Access to Machine , 62 Adj us ting C opy Im age De ns ity , 23 Adjust Orig inal Mode , 56 Auto Off , 18 Auto Start , 31 B Basic Functio ns , 23 Bypas s Pap.
72 T Toner , 15 U User C odes , 31 User Tool s , 53 V Ventil ation hol e , 1 Z Zoom , 34 Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 72 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
73 MEMO Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 73 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
74 UE USA B 04 5 MEMO Ste llaC- EN-CopyF _V4_FM .book P age 74 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2001 1 1:23 AM.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pag es in book=24 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when printed at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Operating Instructio ns System Settings Read th is manual c arefully befo re you use this prod uct and ke ep it handy f or future reference.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pag es in book=24 // Print scale=81% Gap (when printed at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Note to users i .
i ENER GY S TAR Progr am •L o w P o w e r m o d e This product automatic ally lowers its power consum ption 15 minutes after the last copy or pri nt job has finished. Fax reception and printing is st ill pos- sible in L ow Power mo de, but if you wish to make cop ies press th e operatio n switch f irst.
ii Specification Recycled Paper In acco rdance with the ENERG Y STA R Program , we recom mend use of recycl ed pape r which is enviro nmen t friendly. Please c ontact yo ur sales represen tative fo r recom men ded pa per .
iii How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially hazardous s ituation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machine w ithout following t he in- stru ction s unde r thi s symb ol.
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS Manu als for Thi s M achi ne .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... ... 1 Mac hine Type s .. .... .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .. .... .... .... .... .
1 Manuals f or This Machine Thi s is a mu lti- fun ction al ma ch ine comb inin g co pier , pri nte r and fax f uncti ons. A sepa rate manual is provided for each function. Please co nsult the manual t hat suits your needs. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System Settings Provides an ov erview of the machine.
2 Machi ne Ty pes This mac hine has two models. Typ e 2 machine is instal led with the fax uni t as a standard. Type 1 Type 2 Fax unit Option Stand ard Printer un it Option Option Stel la- EN- SysF _V4_ FM.
3 Additional Functio ns Provi ded by Internal Opt ions You can expand the capabili ties of this machine to include fax functions and printer functions.
4 Stel la- EN- SysF _V4_ FM. boo k Page 4 We dnesd ay, July 4, 20 01 1:2 9 P M.
5 1. Modes Changing Mo des Pre ss th e { { { { Copy } } } } , { { { { Facsimil e } } } } or { { { { Printer } } } } key to switch to copy, f ax or printer mode respe ct ively . Limitati on ❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the fol lowing cases: • When scanning in a fax message for transmission.
Modes 6 1 Mult i-acc ess You can carry out another job using a different function while th e current job is being performe d. This allows y ou to handle your jobs efficientl y regardless of h ow the m achine is being used. For example: • While making co pies, the machine can send a fax message that has been stored in memo ry.
Multi-a ccess 7 1 ✩ … means tha t these functions can be used togeth er. ❍ … means that you can interrupt the current job with function keys to pro ceed to a subsequent job. → … means th at a nothe r job w ill au tomati cal ly start after t he cur rent jo b is f in- ished.
Modes 8 1 Copy Mode Changin g to Copy Mode You can alwa ys make a cop y when the machi ne is not printing or scan- ning fax data. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Copy } } } } key. The copy display a ppears on the panel display. Referen ce For details, see the Copy Refer- ence m anua l.
Fac simile Mod e 9 1 Facsimi le Mode Changin g to Facsimile Mode You ca n alway s use th e machin e for faxin g when you are not us ing the scanner funct ion. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Facsim ile } } } } key. The fax display ap pears o n th e panel display.
Modes 10 1 Printer Mo de Changin g to Printer Mode Whenever you pri nt from applica- tions, you do not have to switch to Printer mod e . Refere nce For details, se e the Printer Refe r- ence m anual. Pri nt ing The machine can rec eive a print data while another feature is running.
11 2. User Tools (System Settings) Keys for Us er Tools (Sy stem Settings ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the cop ier feature only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the pr inter and/or fax feature 1. { { { { Cancel } } } } key Press to return to the previous m enu.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 12 2 9. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to use copy functions. 10. { { { { Printer } } } } key (Printer installed machine only) Press to use printer functions. 11. Nu mber k eys Use to enter a numeric value. 12. { { { { Start } } } } key Press to start cop ying or faxing.
Acces sing the User Tool s (System Set tings) 13 2 Acces sing the U ser Tools (System Se ttings) This sect ion is for the key operat ors in charge of this machine. You can change or set the machine's def ault setti ngs. Prep arat io n After using the u ser t ools, b e sure to r eturn to Co py mo de.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 14 2 *1 *1 Displays wh en the optional paper t r a y u n i t i s e q u i p p e d w i t h y o u r mach ine. Note ❒ 1 : Press to go to the next menu.
User Tool s Menu (System Set tings) 15 2 User T ools Menu (Sys tem Se ttings) *1 Displays when the optional pa per tray unit is equipped with your machine.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 16 2 Setting s You Can Change with the U ser Tools Refere nce For details abo ut how to access the user tools , see p.15 “ User Tools Menu (System Settings) ” .
Setting s You Can Change with t he User Tools 17 2 5. Ene rgy Saver Leve l You can select the E nergy Saver l evel. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 1 • Power Con sumptio n: Reduced by about 5% compared to standby mode. • Warm-Up Time: about 5 seconds ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 2 • Power Con sumptio n: Reduced by about 40% compared to standby mode.
User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings) 18 2 9. Pap.Tray Priority (for Copy mode only) When th e optional pa per tray un it is equ ipped with your machin e, you can sele ct a def aul t pap er tray in the follo win g c ondi tio ns: • When the operation switc h is turned on.
19 INDEX A AOF(Keep It On.) , 17 Auto Off Timer , 17 Auto Tr ay Switch , 18 C Clea r Modes key , 11 Clea r/Stop key , 11 Contr ast , 18 Copy Count Display , 16 Copy Mode , 3 , 8 Cur sor keys , 11 E En.
20 UE USA B 04 5 MEMO Stel la-EN-S ysF_V4 _FM.b ook Pag e 20 W ednesda y, July 4, 20 01 1:2 9 PM.
Operating I nstructions Facsi mile Reference <Bas ic Features> Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
i NOTICE R CAUT ION: Use of contr ols, ad justm ents or pe rforma nce of pr oced ures oth er than those specified her e in may result in hazar dous radiation exposure. Shi elde d in terc onne ct cabl es mu st b e empl oye d wit h thi s eq uipm ent to en sure compli ance with t he perti nent RF em ission limi ts governing this d evice.
ii Note to users in Canada - - - - Note: This Class B digital ap paratus complies wi th Canadian ICES-003. Remarque conce rnant les u tilisateurs au Canada - - - - Avertissement: Cet appareil num é rique de la c lasse B est confo rme à la norme NMB-003 du Can- ada.
iii Important Sa fety Instructions Caution When us ing your tele phone equ ipmen t, basic safety pr ecauti ons should always b e f o l l o w e d t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f f i r e , e l e c t r.
iv How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machine w ithout following t he in- stru ction s unde r thi s symb ol.
v Manuals f or This Machine Two Facsi mile Reference manuals are provided , the Basic Features manual and the Advanced Features manual. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs. Basic Featur es (t his manual) The Basic Feat ures manual explains the most frequen tly used fax functions and oper atio ns.
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Getting St arted Mac hine Type s .. .... .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. . 1 Guid e t o C ompon ent s .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .
vii Reception Modes ...................................................................................... 31 Selecti ng th e Receptio n Mode ....... ...... ..... ....... .... ....... ....... ..... ....... .... ....... ... 31 3. Registeri ng Own Nam e/Fax Heade r/Own Fa x Numbe r .
viii StellaCEN-basic_ V4_FM.book Page viii Thur sday, July 19, 2001 1:39 PM.
1 1. Getting Started Machi ne Ty pes This machin e come s in thr ee mo dels. Model A Model B Type 1 Type1 Type 2 Copy Speed 12 copies/minute (A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" ) 13 copies/minute (A4, 8 1.
Getti ng Started 2 1 Guide to Comp onents Front View Follo wing illustra tion is for Mod el B. 1. Expo sure Gla ss Cov er Lower th e Exposure G lass Cover over originals placed on the exposure glass. 2. Documen t Feeder (AD F) (Option for Type 1) Originals wil l be fed automatic ally.
Guide t o Component s 3 1 6. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the po we r on (the On indica tor lights up). To turn the power of f, press this switch a gain (the On indicator goes off). See p.6 “ Tu rnin g On the Power ” . 7. Pape r Tray Set pape r here.
Getti ng Started 4 1 Control Panel 1. Receive File Indicator Lights when a m essage has been received into memory. 2. Com munic ati ng Ind icat or Lights during tran smission or reception. 3. { { { { Job Informati on } } } } key Press to search for informa tion on a spe- cific job.
Cont rol Panel 5 1 18. User Function k eys Each of these c an be p rogra mmed for rapid access to freq uently used fun ctions. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Functi ons Prog rammed b y Default 19. { { { { Resolu tion } } } } key Press to switch between Stand ard , Detail and Fine .
Getti ng Started 6 1 Starti ng the M achine To start the mach ine, tur n on the op- eratio n switch. Note ❒ Thi s machine autom atic ally e nters Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you do not use the machine for a while. See Chapter 2 “ Setti ngs You Can Cha nge wi th the User Tools ” in the System S ettings m an- ual.
St artin g t h e Ma chi ne 7 1 Tu rning Off th e Powe r A A A A Turn off the operation switch. The On indicator will go out. Import ant ❒ Befo re you unp lug the po wer cord , con firm that the disp lay in Facsimil e mode in dicates t hat the remai ning memory space is 100%.
Getti ng Started 8 1 Changing Mo des This mach ine is both a fax an d a copier. I f the machin e is not in Facs imile mode , press the { { { { Facsim ile } } } } key to use fax function. You can set thi s machine to disp lay facsim ile mode immedia tely a fter th e oper- ation switc h is t urned on.
Reading t he Display 9 1 Readi ng the Displ ay The mach ine status and instructions are shown on the display. Note ❒ All pro cedures in this manual assume you are in Fac simile mode. If the ma- chin e is n ot in Fa csimi le mode , p ress t he { { { { Facsimile } } } } key to change to Facsi m - ile mode.
Getti ng Started 10 1 Standby Display Whil e the machi ne is in sta ndby mode (immediately after it is turned on or af- ter t he { { { { Cancel } } } } key is pressed), the fol- lowing d isplay is shown.
11 2. Faxing Transm ission Modes There are two types of transmission. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory Transmission When a fa x doc ument is stor ed i n memory, then transmi ssion starts autom atic all y. This ma kes it convenient w hen you would like to take document s back in a hurry.
Faxing 12 2 Switch ing betw een Memory Transmission and Immediate Trans mission Pre ss th e { { { { Memory T rans. } } } } key to switch between Memory Transmis- sion and Immediate Transmission. When the in dicator of the { { { { Mem ory Trans. } } } } key is not lit, Immediate Transmission i s selected.
Setti ng O rig inal s 13 2 Sett ing Origina ls You can set your originals either in the Do cument F eeder o r on the expo- sure glass. Some types of originals are unsuitable for the Document Feeder so they mu st be set on the exposure glass.
Faxing 14 2 Plac ing a Single Ori ginal on the Expos ure Glass Set ori ginal s tha t cann ot be pl aced i n the Do cument Feed er, such as a book, on the exposure glass one page at a time .
Setti ng O rig inal s 15 2 A A A A Adjust the document guide to match the size of your originals. Align the edges of your originals and stack th em in the Docu ment Feeder face up. Adj ust the docu- men t gu ide to ma tch t he si ze of the originals again.
Faxing 16 2 Memor y Transmis sion Mem ory T ransmi ssi on is conve nien t because: • Fax documents can be scanned much more q uickly. Your scanned docum ent is stored in the memory , and then sent automatica lly, meaning you do not hav e to wait for your document to send.
Memory Tr ansmission 17 2 B B B B Set the original. Lim ita ti on ❒ You can send the first pages from the exposure g lass, and then the remaining pa ges from the Docume nt Feeder. After yo u place the last pa ge on the expo- sure glass, you have 60 seconds to in se rt th e rem ai ning p age s in the Document Feed er.
Faxing 18 2 Sending Originals from the Exposure Glass A A A A Place the first page of your origi nal o n the expo sure gl ass face d ow n. B B B B Dial .
Cancelin g a Memory Transmis sion 19 2 Cancel ing a Memory Transmi ssion Before the Start Key is Press ed A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Clear Mo des } } } } key. Note ❒ When you set the doc ument in the Document Feeder , you can cancel the transmission by jus t removing it.
Faxing 20 2 C C C C Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Display the file you w ant to de- lete. Enter th e file numbe r with the num- ber keys, or search using 0 or 1 . E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select " Yes " G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Immediate Transmissi on 21 2 Immediate Trans mission Immediate Transmission is c onve- nient w hen: • You wish to send a document im- mediately as i t is scanning. • You wish to quickly check whet her you have successfull y c onnected with t he other part y's fax mach ine.
Faxing 22 2 Referen ce p.33 “ Ow n Name/Fax H ead- er/Own Fax Number ” After trans mi ssion the mac hine will retu rn to stan dby mode. Sending Originals from the Exposure Glass A A A A Place th e first page fac e down on the exposure gl ass. B B B B Dial .
Canceli ng an Immediate Transmis sion 23 2 Cancel ing an Immediate Tr ansmissio n Befor e the Start key is Pr essed A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Clear Mo des } } } } key. Note ❒ When yo u have already set the orig ina l, yo u c an al so canc el an Immediate T ransmission by re- moving the origi nal from the machine .
Faxing 24 2 Scan Settings You ma y wish to send many different types of fax messages. Some of these ma y be diff icul t to rep rodu ce at the othe r end. Howeve r, yo ur machi ne has three settings that you c an adjust to help you transmi t your doc u men t with the be st pos sible im age qu ality .
Scan Set tings 25 2 Original Type If your or iginal cont ains photo- gra ph s, illu str atio ns o r diag ram s with complex shadi ng patterns or grays , select the app ropriate O riginal Type to optimize image clarity. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Text Selec t Text to send an original con- taining a high -contrast black-and - white image.
Faxing 26 2 Dialin g There are four main ways to d ial a numb er: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Entering Nu mbers Directly See p.26 “ Entering Nu mber s Di- rectl y ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Using Quick Di als: See p.27 “ Using Quick Dia ls ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Using Speed Dials : See p.
Dialin g 27 2 Note ❒ If a mem or y file is aw aiting trans mis- sion and the "Exceede d the Max.C annot Ad d" me ssage is di s- played when dialing with the num- ber keys, you cannot dial any mo re num bers.
Faxing 28 2 A A A A Make sure that the machine is in stan dby mode. B B B B Set your original and select an y scan settings you require. C C C C Press the Quick Dial key in w hich the dest inatio n's number i s pro- grammed. If the destination's n ame h as been stored, the na me is show n on the displ ay.
Dialin g 29 2 C C C C Pre ss t he { { { { Speed Dial } } } } key. D D D D Enter the tw o digit code (00 to 49) for the destination with th e num- ber key s. Note ❒ When a name i s stored for the destina tion, t he name is dis- played, and when no name is stor ed, th e fax nu mbe r is d is- pla yed.
Faxing 30 2 When Specifyi ng a Group wi th a Qui ck Dial Ma ke sure that the Mem ory Tr ans- mission indicator is lit, if not, press the { { { { Memo ry T rans. } } } } key t o light it. Note ❒ You must regi ster Groups to Qu ick Dials bef orehand. See p.
Re cep ti on M ode s 31 2 Rece ption Mo des The machine can treat incoming fax messages and telephone calls i n three ways. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manual Receive Use this mo de if your line is sha red by a f ax mac hin e and a t ele phon e but you wish to answe r all calls yourself and decide whether they are fa x document s or tel ephone calls .
Faxing 32 2 - - - - Distin ctive Ri ng Two num bers (telephone number and fax num ber) can be assigned to one line by making a contrac t with your telephone co mpany for Distinc- tive Ring. Each numb er will hav e a different ringing pattern. This is use- ful for distingui shing a fax from a te leph on e c all.
33 3. Registering Own Name/Fax Header/Own Fax Number Make sure that all necessary settings are ma de before co nnecting yo ur ma- chine to the tele phone li ne. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Own Name Th i s s ho u ld be yo u r n am e o r co m- pany name, in 20 chara cter s or le ss.
Register ing 34 3 Registering Th e follow ing pr ocedu re desc ribes ho w to mak e i nit ial s ett ings. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed. C C C C Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Own Name/Fa x Header/Own Fax Numbe r 35 3 L L L L Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The programmed Own Name is dis play ed. M M M M Enter your Fax Header. If your Fax Header is the same a s your Own Name, go to step N . N N N N Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing 36 3 D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Setup " is disp laye d. E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 6. Fax Info r- mation " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Own Name/Fa x Header/Own Fax Numbe r 37 3 F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 6. Fax Info r- mation " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select the item that yo u wa nt to dele te.
Register ing 38 3 Quick D ial To save time, you can program a fax number that you use often into a Quick Dial key. T hen, whenever you are sending a message to that loca- tion, just press that Quick Dial key to dia l. Regis tering Th e follow ing pr ocedu re desc ribes how to r egi ster fa x nu mber s in Qu ick Dial keys.
Quick Dia l 39 3 E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Display the number of the Quic k Dial key yo u want t o re gister. Press a Quick Dial key, or search using 0 or 1 . Note ❒ If a Quick Dial has alrea dy been registered, t he conte nts are dis- played.
Register ing 40 3 L L L L Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want t o store another Quick Dial, go to step E . M M M M Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key to re- turn to standby display. Edit ing Th e follow ing pr ocedu re desc ribes how to edit fax num bers registered in Quick Dial keys.
Quick Dia l 41 3 J J J J Press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, a nd th en reenter the destination n ame. Note ❒ Under rare ci rcumstanc es, gar- bled characters may appear during name registr ation if you use th e { { { { Pause/Re dial } } } } key to disp lay the fax number of par- ties locate d in othe r countrie s.
Register ing 42 3 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 2. Del. Quick Dial " is displayed. F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Disp lay t he Quic k Dial key t hat you want to delete. Press a Quick Dial key or search by pressing 0 or 1 .
Quick Dia l 43 3 Label pap er 1. Quic k Di al key nu mber 2. Destination name Stel laCEN- basic_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge 43 Thu rsday , July 19, 20 01 1:3 9 PM.
Register ing 44 3 Speed D ial Regis tering If yo u register numbers in Spe ed Di- als, you c an spe cify t he fa x numbe r simp ly by pressin g the { { { { Speed Di al } } } } key , an d ente rin g a tw o-di git Spee d Di al num be r. The f ollowing pro cedure d escrib es how t o register fax numbers i n Speed Di al s.
Speed Dial 45 3 G G G G Display the number of the S peed Dial you want to r egister (00 to 49). Enter the Spee d Dia l num ber with the numb er keys, or search using 0 or 1 . Note ❒ If you make a mistake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and try again.
Register ing 46 3 Ed iting Th e follow ing pr ocedu re desc ribes how to edi t regis tered Sp eed Dial numb ers . A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed.
Speed Dial 47 3 M M M M Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "On " or "Off". Note ❒ Label i nsertion allows th e desti- nation name th at is pro- grammed in Quick Dial or Speed Di al to be p rinted on the fax w hen it is rec eived at the other end.
Register ing 48 3 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Del. S peed Dial " is displayed. F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Display the Spe ed Dial number you want to delete (00 to 49). Enter the Spee d Dia l num ber with the number keys or search using 0 or 1 .
Groups 49 3 Gro ups If you regul arly broadcast doc uments to the same set of de stinations, you can combine these number s into a group. Then just select the group and each number will be dialed in se- quenc e automati cally .
Register ing 50 3 ❒ It is re com men ded that you prin t the Group Dial list and keep it when you regi ster or change desti- nat ions. See C hapt er 5, "P rinti ng Re port s/ L ist s" i n t he A dva nce d Features manual. ❒ If you register the same de stination in differen t Groups, it is only counted as one i tem.
Groups 51 3 H H H H Specify the destination using one of the following three methods: Enter the fax number with the number keys. Press a Quick Dial key. Press th e { { { { Speed Dial } } } } key , and then en ter a Sp eed Dial number . I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing 52 3 Ed iting You can edit th e grou p name or add destinat ions for progra mmed groups . To ed it a d estinatio n: • Fo r des tin atio ns pr ogr amme d in Quick Di al or Speed Dial, edit the conte nts of the progra mmed Quick Dial or Speed Dial .
Groups 53 3 L L L L Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The n ame is changed. M M M M Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to sele ct "Ye s" if the grou p was p rogrammed in a Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was not . N N N N Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing 54 3 G G G G Display the number of the group to whic h you want to add a num - ber (1 to 5). En ter the g rou p n umb er w it h th e number keys, or search using 0 or 1 . H H H H Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. I I I I Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "Yes".
Groups 55 3 R R R R Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. S S S S Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to sele ct "Ye s" if the grou p was p rogrammed in a Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was not . T T T T Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. If you selected "No", go to step V .
Register ing 56 3 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 5. Prog. Grou p Dia l " is disp laye d. F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Display the group nu mber for the destination yo u want to delete (1 to 5 ). En ter the g rou p n umb er w it h th e number keys, or search using 0 or 1 .
Groups 57 3 T T T T Pr ess t he { { { { OK } } } } key to return to stan dby mode. If yo u wa n t to de let e a n ot her de st i- nat ion f rom th e grou p, g o to s tep F . U U U U Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key to re- turn to standby mode.
Register ing 58 3 - - - - To ch ange and d elete Quick Dial s program med as gro ups: To store an entire gr oup under a dif- ferent Quick Dial key, or to delete the group from the Q uick Dial key a lto- gether, perform the follo wing proce- dure : A Press the { { { { User To ols } } } } key.
Enter ing Character s 59 3 Ent erin g Ch ara cters This section describes how to enter characters. Avail able Characte rs • Letter s: ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZa bcdefgh ijklmnop qrstuvwxyz • Symbol s: – _ (space) . , ( ) / @ & $ ! ' # * % + : ; < = > ? ^ [ ] ` { | } ∼ • Numb ers : 01234567 89 Keys 1.
Register ing 60 3 How to Enter Char acters Th e follow ing pr ocedu re desc ribes how to enter charact ers. Note ❒ When you enter a charac ter, it is show n at t he posi tion of th e curs or. If there is a character at the cursor position, the entered character is shown before the c haracter.
61 4. Troubleshooting Adjust ing Volum e You ca n ch ange t he vol ume o f the fol- lowing sou nds the ma chine makes. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ On Ho ok Sounds when you press the { { { { On Hook Dial } } } } key. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Transmissio n Sounds wh en the machine send a message.
Troubl eshootin g 62 4 H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to adjust the vol- ume . I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The vo lume is adjusted. If you want t o adjust another item, repeat steps G to I . J J J J Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key to re- turn to standby display.
Er ror Mes sa ges 63 4 Err or Mess age s If there is an error, one of t he following messages may appear on the displ ay. It might just flash up briefly, so i f you are watching for errors, stay by t he machine and check the display. Messa ge Problem and Solution Cl ear Mi sfed Ori g.
Troubl eshootin g 64 4 When t he { { { { F acsimile } } } } key is Lit in Re d When the { { { { Fac sim il e } } } } key is lit in red whil e machine is in Copy mo de, press t he { { { { Facsimile } } } } key and read the message. If h is lit, r efer to the ta ble bel ow and ta ke th e appro priat e acti on.
Whe n t he R eceiv e File In dicato r is Lit 65 4 When the Receive Fil e Indicat or is Lit If the Receive File indicator is lit, a me ssage has b een recei ved but could not be printed f or some reason. T he message was stor e d in memory (Subst itute Recep- tion).
Troubl eshootin g 66 4 Solv ing Problems This table lists some common problems and their solutions. Pro blem Re quir ed A ct ion Image back ground appears dirty when a fa x is received at the other end . Adjust the scan densi ty. Refere nce See p.25 “ Image Densi ty (Contrast) ” Printed or sent imag e cont ains spots.
67 INDEX A ADF → Docum ent Feed er , 2 Adjus ting Vol ume Ala rm , 61 Dialing , 61 Key Tone , 61 On Hoo k , 61 Reception , 61 Transmis sion , 61 Advan ced Fe atures , v Auto Recei ve , 31 Auto Sel e.
68 L LCD display , 4 M Mac hine T ypes , 1 Main Pow er Indica tor , 4 main p ower switch , 2 Manual Rece ive , 31 Manuals for Thi s Machine , v Memo ry Tran s.
69 V Volu me , 61 W Wild Cards , 60 Stel laCEN- basic_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge 69 Thu rsday , July 19, 20 01 1:3 9 PM.
70 MEMO Stel laCEN- basic_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge 70 Thu rsday , July 19, 20 01 1:3 9 PM.
71 MEMO Stel laCEN- basic_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge 71 Thu rsday , July 19, 20 01 1:3 9 PM.
72 UE USA B 46 5 MEMO Stel laCEN- basic_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge 72 Thu rsday , July 19, 20 01 1:3 9 PM.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=92 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 3.
i How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manu al, the following sym bols are u sed: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious injury when you m isuse the machine w ithout following t he in- stru ction s unde r thi s symb ol.
ii Manuals f or This Machine Two Facsi mile Reference manuals are provided , the Basic Features manual and the Advanced Features manual. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs. Advanced Featur es (t his manua l) The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions and also ex- plains settings for key o perators.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Transm ission Opt ions Send ing at a Spe cific Time (Se nd Late r) ... .... ....... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... 1 Fax He ader Prin t ... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... .... .... .... ... .... .... .. ....
iv Prin te d Repor ts. .... .. .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... .. .... .... ... 25 File Reserve Report (Switch 03, Bit 2) ......................................................... 25 Communication Result Report (Switch 03, Bit 0) .
v 6. Key Operat or Sett ings Funct ion L ist ...... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ....... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... .. 49 Usin g Key Oper ator Setti ngs. .. .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... .... .... .... .. .
vi Stel laC EN -adva nce d_V 4_F M.b ook Page vi Tue sda y, J uly 17 , 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
1 1. Transmission Options Sending at a Speci fic Time (Send Lat er) Using the Send Later fu nction, you can delay transmission of your fax message until a specified t ime. This allows you to take advanta ge of off- peak tele phone line charge s without having to be by the m achine at the time of transmission.
Transmi ssion Opt ions 2 1 K K K K Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The sp ecified t ime is set. L L L L Specify the destinat ion. If you want t o specify another d es- tination, press the { { { { OK } } } } key and repea t step L . M M M M Pre ss t he { { { { Start } } } } key.
Fax Head er Print 3 1 Fax Header Print Normally, the Fa x Header pr o- grammed i n your mac hine is prin ted at the top of ea ch of the pag es you transmi t when th ey are received at th e othe r end. The to p of the image wi ll be ove rprin ted if ther e is n o mar - gin at t he top of the tr ansmit ted pa ge.
Transmi ssion Opt ions 4 1 Labe l Inserti on With thi s func tion, you can ha ve the receiv er's name p rogra mmed i n Quick Dial or Spee d Dial printed on th e me ssag e wh en it is rec eive d a t the other end. The name will be pr inted at the to p of the pag e and w ill be pre- cede d by "To".
Callin g to Request a Messa ge (Polli ng Reception ) 5 1 Call ing to Reques t a Messag e (Poll ing Rece ption) Use thi s function if you want t o poll a messa ge from another te rminal.
Transmi ssion Opt ions 6 1 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "On". F F F F Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Select the type of Po lling Recep- tion. Secured Polling Reception A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select ” Def au lt ” .
Callin g to Request a Messa ge (Polli ng Reception ) 7 1 File Reserve Report (Polling RX) This repo rt is printe d after Poll ing Re- ception has been set up. You ca n ch eck t he da te a nd tim e, Fax Header, Fi le No., Transm ission c on- dition an d the Other par ty's name wi th this re port .
Transmi ssion Opt ions 8 1 Stel laCEN- advance d_V4_ FM.book Page 8 Tuesd ay, Ju ly 17, 2 001 1: 01 PM.
9 2. Job Information Cancel ing Transmissi on or Recep tion Transmission files are originals that have been stored i n memory and are awaiting transmissio n. The functions that produce transm ission files are Memo ry Transm ission an d Polling Recept ion.
Job Info rmation 10 2 Prin ting a List of Files in Memory (P rint File List ) Print this list if you wish to find out which fi les are st ored in memory and what thei r file numbers are. Know ing the file number can be useful (for ex- ample when erasing files).
Printi ng a Stored Messag e (Print TX File ) 11 2 Printi ng a Sto red Me ssage (Print TX File) If yo u w i sh t o c hec k th e c on t en ts of a fax that is stor ed in memory and has not been sent yet, u se this proce dure to pri nt it out . A A A A Make sure that the machine is in Facsim ile mode a nd the st andby display is shown.
Job Info rmation 12 2 Prin ting a Memory-l ocked Me ssage This is a security function that pre- vents un authorize d indivi duals fro m reading pr inted messages. If Memo ry Lock is swit ched on , all rece ived me s- sa ge s ar e st or ed in mem or y an d ar e not au tomati cally pr inted.
Printi ng the Journa l 13 2 Printing the Journal When a utoma tic co mmunic ation re port pr intin g is turned on, t he Jour nal is printed autom atically after every 50 comm unications (r eceptions + transmis - sions). You can also print a copy of the Journal at any time by following th e pro- cedure below.
Job Info rmation 14 2 Report For mats 1. The Mod e Column Codes an d alphabe t on this column in - form the type of communication. These codes a re explained o n the bo ttom of th e report. 2. The Result Column OK : Succ essf ul comm un icat ion E: An error occurred D: Power F ailure 3.
15 3. Other Transmission Features Handy Dialing Functions Chain Dial This function allows yo u to compose a telephone number from various parts, some of which may be regis- tered in Quick Dials or Speed Dials and some of which ma y be entered using the num ber keys.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 16 3 Tele phone Direct ory This funct ion l ets yo u find a regi s- tere d Spee d Dial q uickly by ju st en- tering a single letter, for example, the first letter o f the name registered for that numbe r. Limitati on ❒ Speed D ial codes c annot be searched for by symbol or numbe r.
On Hook Dial 17 3 On Hoo k Dial You can send a fax messag e without lifting the receiver, w hile still lis ten- ing to the dial tone. If the other party has a telephone fax machine, you can t alk by lifting the receiver afte r your machine has con- nec ted to the irs .
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 18 3 Manual Dial The ex ternal telepho ne is requir ed. You can send a fax message using an exter nal teleph one. Note ❒ The result of tr ansm issi on w ith manual d ial is not m entio ned in the Transmission Result Report (Immediate Transmission).
Transmiss ion Featur es 19 3 Transmiss ion Features SEP Code If yo u want to r ecei ve a mess age stor ed in the memor y of anot her par - ty' s fax m achine, us e this functi on. The mach ine will receive the message with the SEP and PWD code th at matc hes the SEP a nd PW D cod e you enter in the fol lowing procedur e.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 20 3 H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Pollin g RX " is displayed . I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "On". K K K K Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Transmiss ion Featur es 21 3 D D D D Confirm that " 1. SUB " is dis- played. E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Enter the SUB code with the n um- ber key s.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 22 3 More Transmission Functions If Memory Runs Out Whil e Storing an Origin al A A A A If you run out of memory while storing an origina l (free space reach es 0%), “Me mory i s Full .Stori ng S topped .” is d is- played.
More T ransmission Functio ns 23 3 Broadcasting Sequen ce If you dial severa l dest inations for th e same messa ge (Broa dcasti ng), th e messages are sent in the order in wh ich th ey we re di aled.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 24 3 Dual Access The mach ine can s can other messages into memory even while sending a fax message from memory, receiving a message into mem ory , or au tomat- ica lly prin tin g a r epo rt.
Printed Repo rts 25 3 Printed R eports You can o btain re ports fr om your ma- chine either by having your machine print them out au tomatically, or by print ing the m o ut yo ursel f. Note ❒ You can switch on o r off the p rint - ing of the va rious r eport s with the User Parameter s.
Other Tr ansmission Feat ures 26 3 Trans mission Result Report (Immedi ate Transmi ssion) (Switc h 03, B it 5 ) If you turn o n the p rinting o f this re - port, a re port wi ll be prin ted af ter ev- ery Im mediate Transmission so you have a record of whe ther the trans- m ission was succ essf ul or n ot.
27 4. Reception Features General Imme diate Rece ption Each page of a r eceiv ed f ax mes sage is pr inte d as s oon as it is recei ve d. Thi s method is used for standard fax mes- sages. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Displ ay during rec eption The sen der's name or fax numb er appears on the upper li ne.
Re ce pti on Fe atur e s 28 4 Printing Documents that have been Recei ved into Memory (Substit ute Rec eption) If any of the conditions l isted below are met, the machine automatically swi tches to M emo ry Re cept ion m ode and stores me ssages in memory in- stea d of pr inti ng them.
Genera l 29 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Free The mac hin e swi tche s to Subs titu te Reception r egardless of whether or not th e sender has programmed their nam e or fax number . Receivi ng Messages in Tele phone Mode I n t h i s m o d e y o u h a v e t o a n s w e r t h e ca ll you rse lf an d dec ide whet her it i s a fax or a telephone call.
Re ce pti on Fe atur e s 30 4 Printi ng Option s Center Mark W h e n t h i s f u n c t i o n i s t u r n e d o n , mark s are printed hal fway down the left side a nd at th e top cen ter of each page rec eived. This makes it easy for you to posit ion a hole punch er cor- rectly when you file rece ived messag- es.
Pri ntin g Op tion s 31 4 Reception Time When this f unct ion is turn ed on, you can have the date and time when a message was received printed at the bo ttom o f the recei ved im age . Turn it on or of f with t he User Pa ramete rs (Switc h 02 Bit 2).
Re ce pti on Fe atur e s 32 4 When There is No Paper of the Correct Size If there is no paper in your machine that matc hes the size of a received me ssage, the machine wi ll choose a pa per size b ased upon the paper you have available.
Pri ntin g Op tion s 33 4 Limitati on ❒ The paper siz e used to print a r eceived message may be different fro m the size of the sent origi nal. Refere nce p.
Re ce pti on Fe atur e s 34 4 Stel laCEN- advance d_V4_ FM.book Page 3 4 Tuesda y, Jul y 17, 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
35 5. Facsimile User Tools User F unction K eys You c an progra m each of the User Function ke ys ( { { { { F1 } } } } to { { { { F3 } } } } ) with a func tion that you use fr equently. When you w ish to use that fu nction, instead of having to search through s everal menus to fi nd it, just press the appropr iate User Func- tion key.
Facsimil e User Tools 36 5 • The " b " not ation indicates that the U ser Function key li ghts when that func- tion is sele cted ” On ” . To assign a function to a User Function key, perform the following proce dure. Making a User Functi on Key Assignment A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key.
User Func tion Keys 37 5 I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want to r egister another User Fun ction key, repea t the above steps from step F . J J J J Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key. The mach ine returns to stand by mod e.
Facsimil e User Tools 38 5 I I I I Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display " Non e ". J J J J Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want to delete another User Function key, repeat the above steps from step G . K K K K Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key.
Prin ting Report s/Lists 39 5 Printi ng Rep orts/ Lists Thi s fun ction a llo ws y ou to prin t the fo llow in g re ports a nd lis ts ma nua lly . Select a report or list as need ed. • Journal See p.13 “ Prin tin g the Jour nal ” . • TX F ile L ist See p.
Facsimil e User Tools 40 5 Printing the Quick Dial List A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Dial List " is displayed. B B B B Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Confirm that " 1. Quick Dial List " is display ed. C C C C Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Prin ting Report s/Lists 41 5 Printing the Quick Dial Label A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Quick Di al Labe l " is d ispl ayed. B B B B Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key an d try aga in.
Facsimil e User Tools 42 5 Adjust ing the Displa y Co ntrast Use this function to adjust the bright- ness of the display. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed.
Setti ng the Da te an d T ime 43 5 Setting the Date and Time Us e this fun ction to se t your ma - chine's interna l clock to the curren t time and d ate.
Facsimil e User Tools 44 5 Q Q Q Q Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. After " Function Ac cepted " flashes brie fl y in th e disp lay , the next set - ting is displayed. R R R R Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key to re- turn to standby display.
Sett ing the A uto Ring Tim e 45 5 Sett ing the Auto Ring Ti me In A uto Sel ect mode , the mac hine rings a number of times to give you the c hance to pi ck up the han dset b e- fore taki ng the ca ll automatically. You can chan ge the number of rings with the Au to Ring Time.
Facsimil e User Tools 46 5 Sett ing the Fax Re set Ti mer This machin e automatically returns to the standby m ode if you do not use th e m ac hin e fo r a ce rta in peri o d of tim e. You can sele ct this period . A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key.
On Hook Timeout 47 5 On Hook Timeout This m achine automa tically cancel s the O n Hook D ial m ode if y ou do not dial a number from the numeric ke y- pad for a certai n period of time after pres sing the { { { { On Ho ok Dial } } } } key. Y ou can sele ct this period .
Facsimil e User Tools 48 5 Stel laCEN- advance d_V4_ FM.book Page 4 8 Tuesda y, Jul y 17, 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
49 6. Key Operator Settings Function List Here is a list of the func tions that a re availab le for setting. Please refer to the ref- erence page numbers fo r more informat ion. Copy thi s table and use it as a quick referenc e. Displ ay (Specs.) Descriptio n Reference 1.
Key Operator Set tings 50 6 Using Ke y Oper ator Set ting s Th is ch ap ter ex pla ins abo ut fun ct ions the key op era to r hand les . Memory Lock Thi s is a secu rity function to prevent unauth orize d ind ividual s f rom re ad- ing pr inted f ax mes sages.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 51 6 Registering a Specified Sender for Memory Lock You can register S pecifie d Sen ders for thi s functio n. A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display " 2. Progra m Sen der ". B B B B Press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 52 6 Forwar ding Use thi s function to p rint fax s pecified from Spec ified Send ers on your ow n machine and then forward the mes- sages to other fax machines.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 53 6 D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Key Op. Tools " is displayed. E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 2. Forward- ing " is d isplayed. G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 54 6 J J J J Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to disp lay the num- ber of the forwa rding station you wa nt to reg ist er. If a forwarding station is alread y registered, the fax nu mber for th at station i s displayed. K K K K Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 55 6 D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Key Op. Tools " is displayed. E E E E Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 2. Forward- ing ” is displayed. G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 56 6 H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Delete Sta- tion " is displayed. I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to disp l ay th e fa x number of the Forwarding Sta- tion you want to delete.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 57 6 O O O O Use 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display the Speci- fied Send er you wan t to d elet e. P P P P Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The Sp ecified S ender is deleted . If you want to delete another Spec - ified Sender, repeat the above steps from step N .
Key Operator Set tings 58 6 User P aramet ers The User Paramet ers allow you to customize various settings to m atch your needs. To change the fu nction s ettings, set the user p aram eter sw itches. Prep arat io n Access to some User Parameter Setting s requires installation of optional equipment o r that other set tings be made beforehand.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 59 6 02 0 Default setting fo r p rinti ng the Fo rwarding M ark. FORW ARDING MAR K On Off 1 Def aul t s etti ng for th e Ce n- ter Ma rk.
Key Operator Set tings 60 6 05 0 Store i ncoming f axes w hen machine is out of supplies. SUBS TITUTE REC EP- TION On Off 1 Default se tting for Substi- tute Recep tion. COND ITIONS OF MEM - ORY RE CEPTIO N Re ject (If no name or fax number is re- ceiv ed ) Accept (Free) 4 Restricts fax machine u s- age to specific users.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 61 6 Changing the User Parameters We rec ommend that you p rint the User Parameter list and keep it when you register or change a user parame- ter. See p.62 “ Printing the User Pa- rameter List ” . Do n ot chang e any bit sw itches ot her than those s hown o n the pre vious pages.
Key Operator Set tings 62 6 H H H H Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. For a list of th e switches and set - tings, see p.58 “ User P ara mete rs ” . Use the User Para meters tabl e to look up the number of t he switch that you want t o change, and then press the 0 or 1 key to d is pl ay the nu mbe r of th e swit ch.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 63 6 K K K K Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key to re- turn to the standby dis play. Person al Codes This function allows yo u to kee p track of mach ine us age. When Per- sonal Codes are program med, users have to ent er their P ersona l Co de be- fore they send a fax.
Key Operator Set tings 64 6 Deleting A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { User T ools } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed. C C C C Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 65 6 F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Personal Code " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Print List " is dis played. I I I I Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 66 6 ID Code Use th is proced ure to r egister th e fol- lowing kind s of ID Cod es: Importa nt ❒ You ca n confirm ID Co des in the Para meter Settings list. We recom - mend you print a ne w list each time yo u register or change I D Codes.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 67 6 J J J J Enter the M emory Lock ID (4-dig- its) with the number keys. If you ma ke a mis tak e, p re ss t he { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key and t ry again. K K K K Pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. If you w ant to ent er another item, repeat the above steps from step I .
Key Operator Set tings 68 6 PSTN Acc ess Number Use this setting to save having to en- ter a pau se af ter the PS TN acc ess num ber when di aling. W hen you pro- gram an access number, a pause is au- tomatically a dded as soon as that numbe r is pres sed.
Using Key Oper ator Sett ings 69 6 Memory F ile Trans fer If th e ma chin e ca nnot prin t out a re- ceived message, yo u can send all mes- sages currentl y stored in memory to another fax ma chine and have them printed o ut there (for example, when toner is empt y, paper has run out, or the pr inting function is ou t of order).
Key Operator Set tings 70 6 RDS (Remote Diagn ostic Syste m) If your machine has a problem, a ser- vice representat ive can perform vari- o us di ag nost ic task s o ve r t he telephone line from the servi ce sta- tion to try to find out wh at is wrong with you r machine.
71 7. Troubleshooting Reading R eports Error Re port An error report i s print ed when a message could not be successfully sent or received. Possible causes incl ude a probl em with your machine or noise on the tel ephone l ine . If an er ror oc curs d ur- ing transmissio n, re-send the original.
Troubl eshootin g 72 7 Stel laCEN- advance d_V4_ FM.book Page 7 2 Tuesda y, Jul y 17, 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
73 8. Appendix Connecti ng to a Telephone Line and a Telephone To conne ct the mach ine to a telephone line , use a snap-in modular type connec- tor. Importa nt ❒ Make sure the co nnector is the corr ect t ype b efore yo u sta rt.
Appendi x 74 8 Connecti ng the Optional Handset and an External Tel ephone You can conne ct the hands et and a n external telephone to th e machine. You can use them for t elephone ca lls. Note ❒ Some telepho ne may not be con- nected or may suffer reduced func- tional ity.
Specifi cations 75 8 Speci ficatio ns Base Ma chine ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power Consumptio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Proto col: G3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Resolution: • Stand ard: 8 × 3.
Appendi x 76 8 Available Options ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Expan sion Memory ( 32MB) Increase me mory capa city . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Tra y Unit (Option for Model B only) Holds 500 sheets of paper. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document Feeder (ADF) (Opti on for Type1) Origin als will be fed auto matica lly.
Specifi cations 77 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document Feeder (ADF) Limitati on ❒ Even if an or iginal is co rrect ly placed on th e exposure gla ss or in the Docu- ment Feed er, a marg in of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.1 ” to 0 .2 ” )around each edge of th e origin al may no t be sent.
Appendi x 78 8 Maximum Values The following list co ntains the maximum value for each item. Item Standa rd Memory 1MB The nu mber of pages that you c an store in memory (Usi ng A4 size Standard <IT.
Advanc ed Transmiss ion Features 79 8 Advance d Transmiss ion Feat ures Fun ctions se lectab le with the { { { { T rans. Opti on } } } } key ar e as follows. Functi on name Descripti on Reference Send Later Sets the machine to autom a ti- cally start trans mission or polling re ception at an ap- pointed time.
Appendi x 80 8 Job Information Fun ctions se lectab le with the { { { { Job Inform ation } } } } key are as follows. Functi on name De scriptio n Ref erence Cance ling Tran smission or Reception This function ca ncels a file (r eservation) for Memory Tr ansmission or Pollin g Recepti on.
User Tools 81 8 User Tool s Functi on name Descripti on Reference Register/Delete Quick Dial Wh en you register a destina- tion in a Quick Dial , you can specif y the dest ination by only press ing the Quick Dial key. Chapter3 “ Quic k Dial ” in th e Basic Features manu al.
Appendi x 82 8 Setting the Aut o Ring Time You can alter the num ber of rings by chang ing the Auto Ring Time. p.45 “ Setti ng the Auto Ring Time ” Fax Infor mation R egisters your Own Name, Fax Heade r and Own Fax Number. Chapter3 “ Own Name /Fax Header / Ow n Fax Nu mber ” in the Basic Fe atures manual.
Key Ope rator Tool s 83 8 Key Operator Tools Function name Descri ption Refer ence Memory Lock All r eceive d messa ges are stor ed in me mory an d are not aut omatically pr inted. p.50 “ Memo ry Lock ” Forw arding Trans fers rec eived m es- sages to a registered r e- ceiver (for warding dest ination).
84 INDEX A Ad just ing Vo lume → Monito r Volume , 81 Advance d Transmis sion Feat ures , 79 Ass igni ng User Func tion Keys , 36 , 81 Auto Fa x Recep tion Po wer- up , 29 Automatic Redi al , 23 Aut.
85 M Manual Di al , 18 Maxim um Values , 78 Memory File Tr ansfer , 69 , 83 Memory Lock , 50 , 83 Memo ry-loc ked Messa ge , 12 , 80 Memory Lock I D , 66 Memo ry Recept ion , 27 Moni tor Volum e , 81 .
86 UE USA B 46 5 S Secured Pol ling Reception , 5 Send La ter , 1 , 79 SEP Code , 19 SID , 20 Specif ications , 75 Spec ified Se nder , 55 , 56 Specif ied Se nder li st , 57 Speed Dia l , 81 Speed Dia.
Paper type : OK Prince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book=92 // Pr int scale=81% Gap (when pr inted at 81% scal e) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 3.68 0000 mm Introductio n This manua l contains de tailed instr uctions on the operation and maintenance of this machine.
PRINTER Controller Type 1013 Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 (option) Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
Introduction This man ual conta ins detaile d instruc tions on t he operati on and ma intenanc e of this mac hine. To g et maxi mum versat ility from this machine all op erators should carefully read and follow th e instructi ons in this man ual. Please keep this m anual in a h andy pla ce near th e machine.
i Manuals for This Machine Manuals for This Machine There are ten manuals that separately describe the operational procedures for the operation and maintenance of the machine. To enhance saf e and efficient operation of the machine, all users should re ad and follow the instructi ons contained in the following manuals.
ii How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the followin g symbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situatio n which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PCL 6/5e - Acce ssing the Printer Propertie s ........ .............. .................. ... 1 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Pr inter Properties ....... ........... ..
iv 4. Using the Control Panel Adjusting Printer Fe atures .................. .............. .............. .............. .......... 24 Printer Features Menu . ........ ........ .......... ........ ........ ........ .......... ........ ........ .... 24 Printer Features P arameters .
1 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PCL 6/5e - Access ing the Printer Properties Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing the Pri nter Properti es Changing the default printer se ttings A Click [ Star t ] on the taskbar, point to [ Settings ] , and then click [ Printe rs ] .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 2 1 B Select the printer you w ant to use in the [ Name ] list box, an d then click [ Prop- ertie s ] . The Printer Properties appear. C Make any setting s you require and click [ Apply ] . D Click [ OK ] to start printing.
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties 3 1 B Click to select the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [ File ] menu, click [ Prin ting Prefer ences... ] . The Printing Preferen ces Properties appear. D Make any setting s you require and click [ Apply ] .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 4 1 Windows NT 4.0 - Acces sing the Printe r Properti es Changing the default printer settings - Printer Properties Limi tation ❒ Changing the setti ng of the printer requires Full Control access pe rmission.
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties 5 1 Making printer settings from an a pplication To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Proper- ties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with W indows NT 4.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 6 1 PostScript - Setting Up for Printing Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing the Pri nter Properti es Changing the default printer se ttings To make the Printer de fault settings, first op en the Printer Properties dialog box from the [ Prin ter s ] window.
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing 7 1 B Select the printer you w ant to use in the [ Name ] list box, an d then click [ Prop- ertie s ] . The Printer Properties appear. C Make any setting s you require and click [ Apply ] . D Click [ OK ] to start printing.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 8 1 B Click to select the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [ File ] menu, click [ Prin ting Prefer ences... ] . The Printing Preferen ces Properties appear.
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing 9 1 Windows NT 4.0 - Acces sing the Printe r Properti es Changing the default printer settings - Printer Properties Limi tation ❒ Changing the setti ng of the printer requires Full Control access pe rmission.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 10 1 Making printer settings from an a pplication To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Proper- ties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with W indows NT 4.
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing 11 1 Setting up for printing from an applicat ion A Open the file you want to print. B On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ] . The [ Pr inte r ] dialog box appears. C Confirm that the p rinter is selected in t he [ Printer : ] box, and make the p rint- er setting s.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 12 1 Canceling a Print Job Windows 95 /98/Me, Windows 2000, Windo ws NT 4.0 - Cancel ing a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on the Win dows taskbar. A window appears, showing a ll the print jobs that are currently queui ng to be printed.
Canceling a Print Job 13 1 Macintosh - Canceli ng a Print Job A Double-click the printer's icon on the desktop. A window appears, showing a ll the print jobs that are currently queui ng to be printed. Chec k the current status o f the job you want to can cel.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 14 1.
15 2. Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver This section des cribes how to uninstall the printer driver . The actual procedure may differ depend ing on the operating system. Fo llo w on e o f the ap prop ri ate p ro ced ur es b elo w.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software 16 2 Windows NT 4.0 - Uni nstalling th e PCL 6/5e Printer Dr iver Limi tation ❒ Uninstalling a printer driver re quires Full Contr ol access permission. Mem- bers of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and P ower Us- ers groups have Full Control Permission b y default.
Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver 17 2 Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver This sect ion describes how to unins tall the PostScript printer driver. Th e ac tua l pro ced ur e ma y diff er de pe ndi ng o n the ope ra ting syst em . Fo llo w on e o f the ap prop ri ate p ro ced ur es b elo w.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software 18 2 Windows NT 4.0 - Uni nstalling th e PostScript Print er Driver Limi tation ❒ Uninstalling a printer driver re quires Full Contr ol access permission. Mem- bers of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and P ower Us- ers gro ups have Ful l Contro l Permi ssion by def ault.
19 3. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages o n the Control Panel Messages/Second messages Description Solu tion Add Toner Open Front Cover and /Follow Instructions to Rep lace i t Toner is running o ut. It is time to supply toner. Clear Misfeed(s) /Follow instructions in Front Cover There is misf eed at the front cover.
Troubleshooting 20 3 Processing... The printer is pr o cessing in- ternally. Wait for a while. Ready The printer is online and ready to print. If you want to set the printer offline, press { Online } . Resetting Job... The print job is be ing reset. Wait for a while.
Machine Does Not Print 21 3 Machine Does Not Print Pos sibl e Cause So luti ons Is the power on? Turn on the machine. Is the interface ca ble properly connected? Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or screws , make sure that they are fastened securely.
Troubleshooting 22 3 Other Printing Problems Problem Action An image is printed on the reverse side of the paper. Set the paper upside down. Multiple pages are fed through the printer at once. Remove all the p aper from the tray and fan them gently. Paper misf eeds occur frequently.
23 4. Using the Control Panel Though the factory default settin gs of the printer are suitable for most prin ting jobs, the "Printer Features" gives you access to a number of settings that control basic printer operations. "Print er Features" settin gs you make are retained even when you turn off the printer.
Using the Control Panel 24 4 Adjusting Printer Features Printer Features Menu There are four menu item s in the "Printer Features" menu. • Job Control • Network Setu p • Mainte nance • List Print You can se lect functions in the follow ing table.
Adjusting Printer Features 25 4 *1 Optional Network Int erface Bo ard is required . *2 Option al PostScript level2 Compat ible Ki t is requir ed. Access ing the P rinter Feat ures Menu Press { User Tools/Counter } . Press the 0 or 1 key to display “ 5.
Using the Control Panel 26 4 Note ❒ 1 key : Press to go to the next menu. ❒ 0 key : Press to go back to the previous menu ❒ Afte r makin g the prin ter se ttings , be sur e to retu rn to th e previo us menu by pressin g { Cancel } . ❒ After making the printer settings, press { User Tools/C ounter } to return to the initial display.
Printer Features Parameters 27 4 Printer Features Parameters Job Control Menu There are four men u item s in the “ Job Cont rol ” menu . • Paper I nput • Print Quality • Sys tem • PCL Menu.
Using the Control Panel 28 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print Quality Bypas s Paper Size You can sp ecify th e paper si ze, stand ard or cu stom, for the bypa ss tray. When the by pass paper si ze is no t spe cifie d, the paper si ze you set on the control panel is used.
Printer Features Parameters 29 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System Toner Saving You can s elect whether to enable Toner Saving. • Off • On Note ❒ Default: Off ❒ If “ Toner Saving ” is “ On ” , “ EdgeSmoothing ” is ignored even if it is “ On ” .
Using the Control Panel 30 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ PCL Menu Auto Continue You can set whethe r to enable Auto Continue. When it is set to “ On ” , the printing continues even if the following error messages appe ar on the disp lay. “ Print Overrun. Job Incomplete.
Printer Features Parameters 31 4 Font Number You can set the ID of the default font you wa nt to use. • 0 to 54 (for Int ernal) • 1 to 50 (for Downl oad source) Note ❒ Default: Interna l ❒ Default: 0 Point Size You can set the point size you want to use for the def ault font.
Using the Control Panel 32 4 Changing the Paper Input Menu The followin g procedure describes c hanging the “ Tr ay Pri ority ” as an example in the “ Pape r Input ” menu. A Press { User Tools/ Counter } . B Press t he 0 or 1 key until the following mes sage appears on the panel dis- play.
Printer Features Parameters 33 4 F Press { OK } . The followi ng screen appears on the pane l display. G Press the 0 or 1 key to select the tray type you want to use. H Press { OK } . “ Programmed ” is displayed for two seconds. I The following screen appe ars on the panel display.
Using the Control Panel 34 4 Network Setup Menu There are thr ee menu items in the “ Network Setup ” menu. • IP Ad dress • Subn et Mask • Gateway Address Note ❒ This “ N etwork Setup ” menu appears only when installing the opti onal Net- work Interface Board.
Printer Features Parameters 35 4 Maintenanc e Menu There are thr ee menu items in the “ Mai ntenance ” menu. • Restart Printer • Menu Re set • Hex Dump Maintenan ce Pa rameters Restar ting a Prin ter The following procedure describes select ing the “ Restart Printer ” as an ex ample in the “ Mainte nance ” me nu.
Using the Control Panel 36 4 B Press t he 0 or 1 key until the following mes sage appears on the panel dis- play. C Press { OK } . The followi ng screen appears on the pane l display. D Press t he 0 or 1 key until the following mes sage appears on the panel dis- play.
Printer Features Parameters 37 4 List Prin t Menu There are four men u item s in the “ Li st Print ” menu. • Configuratio n Page • Menu Li st • PCL Font List • PS Font List List Print Para.
Using the Control Panel 38 4 C Press { OK } . The followi ng screen appears on the pane l display. D Press t he 0 or 1 key until the following mes sage appears on the panel dis- play. E Press { OK } . The followi ng screen appears on the pane l display.
Printer Features Parameters 39 4 Interpreting the Conf iguration Page Reference ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer ID Shows the serial number ass igned to the board by its manuf acturer. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Firmware Vers ion Shows the version number of the printer firmware.
Using the Control Panel 40 4 Adjusting System Settings Accessing the Syst em Settings A Press { User Tools/ Counter } . B Press the 0 or 1 key to display “ 2.System Settings ” . C Press { OK } . The followi ng screen appears on the pane l display.
Adjusting System Settings 41 4 System Settings Parameters This sect ion co ntains the in formation about the parameters u sed for the prin ter. Reference For more informati on about the other parameters in the System Settings menu , see th e “ System Settings ” manual.
Using the Control Panel 42 4.
43 5. Appendix Specifications This secti on contains the electrical and hard ware specification s fo r the printer, including the information about the options.
Appendix 44 5 Options Netwo rk Interfac e Boar d Type 1018 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Topology: Ethernet (10BaseT /100BaseTX) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocols: TCP/ IP, IPX/SP X, AppleT alk ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Interface Connect or: RJ45 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Required C able: Int er fac e ca bl e wi th f err ite co re Interface cable is no t provided with this option.
45 INDEX A Auto Off Time r , 41 C Can cel key , 26 Con fig. Page , 37 Config uration Page , 37 E error , 19 F Fun ctio n Prio rity , 41 H Hex Du mp , 35 J Job Control , 25 , 27 L List Print , 25 , 37 .
46 UE USA B441 W Window s 2000 PCL 5e, uninstallin g , 15 PCL 6, uninst alling , 15 PostScript , uninstalling , 17 pri nter prop erti es, PCL , 2 pri nter prop erties, PostSc ript , 7 Window s 95/98/M.
Note to users in the United States of A merica Notice: This equi pment has been tested and found t o comply w ith the limi ts for a Cl ass B digital device, pursu- ant to Part 15 of the FCC Ru les. These limits a re desig ned to provid e reason able prote ction again st harmfu l interferen ce in a resident ial instal lation.
PRINT ER Controlle r Type 101 3 Operating Instructions Printer Re ference 2 (option) UE USA B441-86 27.
An important point after buying a device Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 (or even before the purchase) is to read its user manual. We should do this for several simple reasons:
If you have not bought Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 yet, this is a good time to familiarize yourself with the basic data on the product. First of all view first pages of the manual, you can find above. You should find there the most important technical data Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 - thus you can check whether the hardware meets your expectations. When delving into next pages of the user manual, Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 you will learn all the available features of the product, as well as information on its operation. The information that you get Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 will certainly help you make a decision on the purchase.
If you already are a holder of Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515, but have not read the manual yet, you should do it for the reasons described above. You will learn then if you properly used the available features, and whether you have not made any mistakes, which can shorten the lifetime Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515.
However, one of the most important roles played by the user manual is to help in solving problems with Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515. Almost always you will find there Troubleshooting, which are the most frequently occurring failures and malfunctions of the device Ricoh Printer/Fax/Scanner/Copier Aficio 1515 along with tips on how to solve them. Even if you fail to solve the problem, the manual will show you a further procedure – contact to the customer service center or the nearest service center
